Introduction 4
Instrument Cluster 14
Warning and control lights 14
Gauges 18
Entertainment Systems 20
AM/FM stereo cassette with CD 20
AM/FM stereo with in-dash six CD 24
Navigation system 33
Climate Controls 72
Manual heating and air conditioning 72
Rear window defroster 73
Lights 74
Headlamps 74
Turn signal control 79
Bulb replacement 80
Driver Controls 86
Windshield wiper/washer control 86
Steering wheel adjustment 88
Power windows 90
Mirrors 91
Speed control 92
Message center 94
Locks and Security 109
Keys 109
Locks 109
Anti-theft system 115
Table of Contents
1
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Table of Contents
Seating and Safety Restraints 117
Seating 117
Safety restraints 124
Air bags 138
Child restraints 151
Tires, Wheels and Loading 163
Tire Information 167
Tire Inflation 167
Changing tires 170
Lug Nut Torque 179
Vehicle loading 189
Trailer towing 196
Recreational towing 200
Driving 201
Starting 201
Brakes 205
Transmission operation 208
Roadside Emergencies 219
Getting roadside assistance 219
Hazard flasher switch 220
Fuel pump/High voltage shut-off switches 220
Fuses and relays 222
Jump starting 229
Wrecker towing 237
Customer Assistance 239
Reporting safety defects (U.S. only) 247
Cleaning 248
Table of Contents
2
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications 254
Engine compartment 257
Engine oil 258
Battery 261
Fuel information 268
Air filter(s) 282
Part numbers 284
Refill capacities 285
Lubricant specifications 287
Accessories 293
Scheduled Maintenance Guide 296
Normal Scheduled Maintenance and Log 299
Special Operating Conditions and Log 316
Motorcraft Premium Gold Coolant Change Record 317
Index 319
All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic or mechanical
including photocopying, recording or by any information storage and retrieval
system or translation in whole or part is not permitted without written
authorization from Ford Motor Company. Ford may change the contents without
notice and without incurring obligation.
Copyright © 2004 Ford Motor Company
Table of Contents
3
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning
WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and
certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to
the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known
to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
CONGRATULATIONS
Congratulations on acquiring your new Ford Escape Hybrid. Please take
the time to get well acquainted with your vehicle by reading this
handbook. The more you know and understand about your vehicle, the
greater the safety and pleasure you will derive from driving it.
For more information on Ford Motor Company and its products visit the
following website:
• In the United States: www.ford.com
• In Canada: www.ford.ca
Additional owner information is given in separate publications.
This Owner’s Guide describes every option and model variant available
and therefore some of the items covered may not apply to your
particular vehicle. Furthermore, due to printing cycles it may describe
options before they are generally available.
Remember to pass on this Owner’s Guide when reselling the vehicle. It
is an integral part of the vehicle.
Fuel pump and high voltage battery shut-off switches: In
the event of an accident the fuel pump shut-off switch will
automatically cut off the fuel supply to the engine and the high voltage
shut-off switch cuts off power from the high voltage battery. These
switches can also be activated through sudden vibration (e.g. collision
when parking). For information on resetting the fuel pump shut-off
switch and the high voltage battery shutoff switch, refer to the Fuel
pump/high voltage shut-off switches in the Roadside Emergencies
chapter.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Introduction
Introduction
4
SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION
Warning symbols in this guide
How can you reduce the risk of personal injury to yourself or others? In
this guide, answers to such questions are contained in comments
highlighted by the warning triangle symbol. These comments should be
read and observed.
Warning symbols on your vehicle
When you see this symbol, it is
imperative that you consult the
relevant section of this guide before
touching or attempting adjustment
of any kind.
Protecting the environment
We must all play our part in
protecting the environment. Correct
vehicle usage and the authorized
disposal of waste, cleaning and
lubrication materials are significant
steps towards this aim. Information in this respect is highlighted in this
guide with the tree symbol.
BREAKING-IN YOUR VEHICLE
Your vehicle does not need an extensive break-in. Try not to drive
continuously at the same speed for the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of
new vehicle operation. Vary your speed frequently in order to give the
moving parts a chance to break in.
Drive your new vehicle at least 500 miles (800 km) before towing a
trailer.
Do not add friction modifier compounds or special break-in oils during
the first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation, since these
additives may prevent piston ring seating. See Engine oil in the
Maintenance and Specifications chapter for more information on oil
usage.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Introduction
5
NORMAL VEHICLE OPERATION
Your Escape Hybrid has unique qualities which cause it to operate
differently than a typical vehicle.
Starting the vehicle
• The engine will start and run when you first turn the ignition key to
the start position.
• The engine cannot be started in the N (Neutral) position.
• Depending upon temperature and the high voltage battery’s state of
charge, the engine may shut off shortly after starting the vehicle; this
is a normal condition and you do not need to restart the vehicle. The
Ready Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate to
indicate the vehicle is running. For more Ready Indicator Light
information, refer to Warning lights and chimes in the Instrument
Cluster chapter.
DRIVING THE VEHICLE
Starting Out:
Under normal operation with the vehicle at operating temperature, the
engine will start automatically as you accelerate. Sometimes the engine
will start immediately as you begin moving, while other times the vehicle
will obtain a speed of up to 25 mph (40 km/h) before the engine starts.
You may hear and feel the engine starting as you transition from
electrical to hybrid (gas engine on) operation. This is a normal condition.
These are some of the conditions that may cause engine start-up:
• High voltage battery re-charge is required.
• Driver acceleration demands exceed electric motor capability.
• Outside air temperature is overly hot or cold.
• Certain climate system modes of operation.
• If you are starting up hill or accelerating quickly, the engine will start
immediately as operating conditions require additional power.
Note: If the high voltage battery is very cold or very hot, the engine may
operate more than under normal conditions, and vehicle performance
may be temporarily reduced. This is a normal condition.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Introduction
6
Transmission operation
• Your vehicle does not shift like a traditional vehicle. You may feel
transitions between the various operating modes of the hybrid system,
but no actual shifting occurs. For more information about transmission
operation, refer to Understanding the gearshift positions of the
Electronically Controlled Continuously Variable Transaxle (eCVT)
in the Driving chapter.
Stopping the vehicle
• The vehicle’s engine may shut off as you come to a stop; this is a
normal condition and helps to conserve fuel. You do not need to
restart the vehicle.
Neutral operation
• The vehicle does not charge the high voltage battery in the N
(Neutral) position. Do not idle the vehicle in N (Neutral) for extended
periods as this will discharge your high voltage battery.
Low gear operation
• In L (Low) gear, you may feel an increased sensation of engine
braking as you remove your foot from the accelerator. L (Low) gear
can be helpful when driving down an incline; unlike in a conventional
vehicle, L (Low) does not offer an advantage over D (Drive) in uphill
or offroad driving conditions.
Reverse operation
• Vehicle speed is limited to 22 mph (35km/h) while operating in R
(Reverse) gear.
ESCAPE HYBRID UNIQUE OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS
• You may hear some unique sounds from a hybrid vehicle. The Escape
Hybrid is equipped with a high voltage battery air conditioning system
in the rear of the vehicle which cools the high voltage battery in order
to ensure high voltage battery life and optimize performance. You may
hear a slight clunk or tap noise as the vent door operates, as well as a
fan noise in the rear of the vehicle; this noise is the high voltage
battery cooling fan. The high voltage battery cooling may also continue
to operate for short durations after the vehicle has been turned off.
These vehicle conditions and noises are normal and do not require
service.
• You may hear a pumping sound when you enter the vehicle or a
venting sound a few minutes after parking the vehicle. This is due to
charging and discharging of the hydraulic portion of the regenerative
braking system.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Introduction
7
• You may hear a slight whine or whistle when operating your vehicle.
This noise could occur at idle, and during cruising and accelerating; it
is caused by the normal operation of electrical generator in the hybrid
system.
• The Escape Hybrid’s hydraulic brake system used for regenerative
braking is different from other vehicles. The noise from the ABS pump
motor and the brake pedal pulsation are much less than on vehicles
with conventional ABS. Noise and pedal pulsation during ABS may not
be noticed. For more information about braking, refer to Braking in
the Driving chapter.
• The engine speed in an Escape Hybrid is not directly tied to the
vehicle speed. Under certain conditions, the engine speed may appear
much higher than that of a conventional automobile. This is a normal
condition and is caused by engine speed optimization to maximize fuel
economy.
• During certain events (such as vehicle servicing) your low voltage
(underhood) battery may become disconnected or disabled. When this
occurs, and after reconnecting the low voltage (underhood) battery
and driving the vehicle, the engine may continue to operate for 3-5
seconds after the key is turned to the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position. This is
a normal condition, as the vehicle’s computers are relearning the
operating characteristics of your particular engine in order to operate
it at maximum efficiency.
• The high voltage battery may go through a self-reconditioning process
from time to time; these events optimize high voltage battery
performance. You may notice slight changes to driveability during the
reconditioning process. This is a normal condition.
• If the vehicle is left inoperative for over 31 days, it may be necessary
to jumpstart the vehicle. For more information, refer to Jump
starting your vehicle (Low voltage [underhood] battery only) in
the Roadside Emergencies chapter.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Introduction
8
DRIVING TO OPTIMIZE FUEL ECONOMY
Fuel economy can be significantly impacted by your driving habits and
accessory usage. To optimize the fuel economy in your vehicle, please be
aware of the following vehicle functions which affect fuel economy:
A/C operation
• With the climate control system set to MAX A/C, defrost, or
defrost/floor mode (the orange graphics on your climate control), the
engine will run continuously, reducing fuel economy. Setting the
climate control system to A/C mode or A/C
mode also reduces
fuel economy, but in this case the A/C only operates when the engine
is already running due to other demands. Because the engine does not
run continuously, A/C
mode is more fuel efficient than MAX
A/C mode.
Driver habits
• In general, better fuel economy is achieved during moderate
acceleration and deceleration as opposed to aggressive acceleration
and deceleration. This is true regardless of the mode in which you’re
operating your vehicle.
• To maximize fuel economy, try to extend the length of time the
vehicle operates in electric mode by lightly accelerating. The more you
keep the engine from starting, the better fuel economy you will
achieve.
• For more information on improving the fuel economy of your Escape
Hybrid, refer to Essentials of good fuel economy in the Maintenance
and Specifications chapter.
SPECIAL NOTICES
Emission warranty
The New Vehicle Limited Warranty includes Bumper-to-Bumper
Coverage, Safety Restraint Coverage, Corrosion Coverage, and 6.0L
Power Stroke Diesel Engine Coverage. In addition, your vehicle is eligible
for Emissions Defect and Emissions Performance Warranties. For a
detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered, refer to
the Warranty Guide that is provided to you along with your Owner’s
Guide.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Introduction
9
Special instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic
controls.
Please read the section Supplemental restraint system (SRS)
in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter. Failure to follow
the specific warnings and instructions could result in personal injury.
Front seat mounted rear-facing child or infant seats should
NEVER be placed in front of an active passenger air bag.
Service Data Recording
Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting and
storing diagnostic information about your vehicle. This potentially
includes information about the performance or status of various systems
and modules in the vehicle, such as engine, throttle, steering or brake
systems. In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle, Ford
Motor Company, Ford of Canada, and service and repair facilities may
access vehicle diagnostic information through a direct connection to your
vehicle when diagnosing or servicing your vehicle.
Event Data Recording
Other modules in your vehicle — event data recorders — are capable of
collecting and storing data during a crash or near crash event. The
recorded information may assist in the investigation of such an event.
The modules may record information about both the vehicle and the
occupants, potentially including information such as:
• how various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• whether or not the driver and passenger seatbelts were buckled;
• how far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or the
brake pedal;
• how fast the vehicle was traveling; and
• where the driver was positioning the steering wheel.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Introduction
10
To access this information, special equipment must be directly connected
to the recording modules. Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada do
not access event data recorder information without obtaining consent,
unless pursuant to court order or where required by law enforcement,
other government authorities or other third parties acting with lawful
authority. Other parties may seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada.
Notice to owners of pickup trucks and utility type vehicles
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than
other types of vehicles.
Before you drive your vehicle, please read this Owner’s Guide carefully.
Your vehicle is not a passenger car. As with other vehicles of this type,
failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury or death.
Be sure to read Driving off road in the Driving chapter.
Using your vehicle with a snowplow
Do not use this vehicle for snowplowing.
Your vehicle is not equipped with a snowplowing package.
Using your vehicle as an ambulance
Do not use this vehicle as an ambulance.
Your vehicle is not equipped with the Ford Ambulance Preparation
Package.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Introduction
11
These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle.
Vehicle Symbol Glossary
Safety Alert
See Owner’s Guide
Fasten Safety Belt Air Bag-Front
Air Bag-Side Child Seat
Child Seat Installation
Warning
Child Seat Lower
Anchor
Child Seat Tether
Anchor
Brake System
Anti-Lock Brake System
Brake Fluid -
Non-Petroleum Based
Powertrain Malfunction Speed Control
Master Lighting Switch Hazard Warning Flasher
Fog Lamps-Front Fuse Compartment
Fuel Pump Reset Windshield Wash/Wipe
Windshield
Defrost/Demist
Rear Window
Defrost/Demist
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Introduction
12
Vehicle Symbol Glossary
Power Windows
Front/Rear
Power Window Lockout
Child Safety Door
Lock/Unlock
Interior Luggage
Compartment Release
Symbol
Panic Alarm Engine Oil
Engine Coolant
Engine Coolant
Temperature
Do Not Open When Hot Battery
Avoid Smoking, Flames,
or Sparks
Battery Acid
Explosive Gas Fan Warning
Power Steering Fluid
Maintain Correct Fluid
Level
MAX
MIN
Emission System Engine Air Filter
Passenger Compartment
Air Filter
Jack
Check fuel cap Low tire warning
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Introduction
13
WARNING LIGHTS AND CHIMES
Warning lights and gauges can alert you to a vehicle condition that may
become serious enough to cause expensive repairs. A warning light may
illuminate when a problem exists with one of your vehicle’s functions.
Many lights will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure the
bulb works. If any light remains on after starting the vehicle, have the
respective system inspected immediately.
Note: A message may be displayed in the message center in conjunction
with an illuminated warning light, refer to Message Center in the Driver
Controls chapter for more information.
Service engine soon: The Service
engine soon indicator light
illuminates when the ignition is first
turned to the RUN position to check
the bulb. Solid illumination after the engine is started indicates the On
Board Diagnostics System (OBD-II) has detected a malfunction. Refer to
On board diagnostics (OBD-II) in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter. If the light is blinking, engine misfire is occurring which could
damage your catalytic converter. Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid
heavy acceleration and deceleration) and have your vehicle serviced
immediately.
Note: If ignition is turned to the RUN position but the vehicle has not
been started, the light will stay illuminated and “SERVICE EMISSION
SYS” will be displayed in the message center, refer to Message Center in
the Driver Controls chapter.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Instrument Cluster
14
Under engine misfire conditions, excessive exhaust temperatures
could damage the catalytic converter, the fuel system, interior
floor coverings or other vehicle components, possibly causing a fire.
Service soon: Illuminates when the
vehicle has detected a malfunction.
Report the fault to a dealer at the
earliest opportunity.
Brake system warning light: To
confirm the brake system warning
light is functional, it will
momentarily illuminate when the
ignition is turned to the RUN
position (when the engine is not running), or in a position between RUN
and START, or by applying the parking brake when the ignition is turned
to the RUN position. If the brake system warning light does not
illuminate at this time, seek service immediately from your dealership.
Illumination after releasing the parking brake indicates low brake fluid
level and the brake system should be inspected immediately by your
servicing dealership.
Driving a vehicle with the brake system warning light on is
dangerous. A significant decrease in braking performance may
occur. It will take you longer to stop the vehicle. Have the vehicle
checked by your dealer immediately.
Anti-lock brake system (ABS): If
the lamp stays on for more than a
few seconds, then an ABS fault is
indicated, have the system serviced
immediately. Normal braking is still
functional unless the brake warning light also is illuminated.
Air bag readiness: If this light fails
to illuminate when ignition is turned
to ON, continues to flash or remains
on, have the system serviced
immediately. A chime will also
sound when a malfunction in the supplemental restraint system has been
detected.
!
BRAKE
ABS
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Instrument Cluster
15
Safety belt: Reminds you to fasten
your safety belt. A chime will also
sound to remind you to fasten your
safety belt. If this light continues to
flash the chime will sound again to
remind you to fasten your safety belt.
Master vehicle electrical hazard
warning lamp: Indicates Hybrid
component fault/failure that will
cause the vehicle to shutdown or
fail to start.
Note: If the vehicle is still running, the vehicle will soon
shutdown without further warning and should be stopped safely.
If this lamp is lit, stop the vehicle, shift to P (Park), turn the key to the
Off position, and attempt to restart the vehicle. If the fault remains, the
vehicle may require refueling, jump starting, resetting of the shut-off
switches, or service. For information regarding Jump starting the high
voltage battery and Fuel pump/High voltage shut-off switches please
refer to the Roadside Emergencies chapter.
Charging system: Illuminates when
the 12V charging system is not
working properly.
Ready indicator light: Illuminates
once the vehicle has successfully
started. Indicates the vehicle is
ready to drive even when you don’t
hear the engine running.
Engine oil pressure: Illuminates
when the oil pressure falls below the
normal range, refer to Engine oil in
the Maintenance and
Specifications chapter.
Engine or motor electronic
coolant temperature: Illuminates
when the coolant temperature
exceeds the threshold. When the light is flashing or remains on, stop the
vehicle as soon as possible, switch off the engine and let cool. Refer to
Engine or motor electronic coolant in the Maintenance and
Specifications chapter.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Instrument Cluster
16
Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is
running or hot.
ABS active/Traction control娂
active (if equipped): Flashes
when the ABS system is active. If
the light remains on, have the
system serviced immediately, refer
to the Driving chapter for more
information.
Turn signal: Illuminates when the
left or right turn signal or the
hazard lights are turned on. If the
indicators stay on or flash faster, check for a burned out bulb.
High beams: Illuminates when the
high beam headlamps are turned on.
Key-in-ignition warning chime: Sounds when the key is left in the
ignition in the OFF/LOCK or ACCESSORY position and the driver’s door
is opened.
Headlamps on warning chime: Sounds when the headlamps or parking
lamps are on, the ignition is off (the key is not in the ignition) and the
driver’s door is opened.
Turn signal chime: Sounds when the turn signal lever has been
activated to signal a turn and not turned off after the vehicle is driven
more than 1/2 mile (0.8 km).
Transmission not in park chime: Sounds when the PRNDL is not in P
(Park) position, the driver’s door is ajar and the ignition is ON.
HEV Engine off Reminder Chime: Sounds for 10 seconds when the
PRNDL is in the P (Park) position and the Driver’s door is ajar(open)
while ignition is ON.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Instrument Cluster
17
GAUGES
Speedometer: Indicates the
current vehicle speed.
Battery gauge: Provides
information about the vehicle’s
energy usage.
• ASSIST — Battery provides extra
power to boost the vehicle’s
acceleration.
• CHARGE — Storing extra energy
in the battery when coasting or
slowing down.
Odometer: Registers the total miles
(kilometers) of the vehicle.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Instrument Cluster
18
Trip odometer: Registers the miles
(kilometers) of individual journeys.
To reset, press and hold the trip
reset button for one or two seconds;
this returns the trip odometer to
zero.
Tachometer: Indicates the engine
speed in revolutions per minute.
Driving with your tachometer
pointer continuously at the top of
the scale (in the red zone) may
damage the engine. The pointer will
indicate engine RPMs when the
engine is running and point at the
EV symbol when the engine is off and the vehicle is running on pure
electrical power.
Fuel gauge: Indicates
approximately how much fuel is left
in the fuel tank (when the ignition
is in the ON position). The fuel
gauge may vary slightly when the
vehicle is in motion or on a grade.
Refer to Filling the tank in the
Maintenance and Specifications
chapter for more information.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Instrument Cluster
19
PREMIUM AM/FM STEREO/CASSETTE/SINGLE CD (IF EQUIPPED)
1. Power/volume: Press to turn
ON/OFF; turn to increase/decrease
volume.
2. Scan: Press to hear a brief
sampling of all listenable stations,
tape selections or CD tracks. Press
again to stop.
3. CD slot: Insert a CD with the
label side up.
CD units are designed to play
commercially pressed 4.75 in (12
cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility,
certain recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not
function correctly when used in Ford CD players. Irregular
shaped CDs, CDs with a scratch protection film attached, and CDs
with homemade paper (adhesive) labels should not be inserted
SCAN
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Entertainment Systems
20
into the CD player. The label may peel and cause the CD to
become jammed. It is recommended that homemade CDs be
identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive
labels. Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please contact your
dealer for further information.
4. Cassette door: Insert the
cassette with the opening to the
right.
5. Eject: Press to eject the
cassette/CD. The radio will resume
playing.
6. Tape: Press to start tape play.
Press to stop tape during
rewind/fast forward.
CD: Press to start CD play. With the
dual media audio, press CD to
toggle between single CD and CD
changer play (if equipped).
7. Mute: Press to MUTE playing
media; press again to return to the
playing media.
8. Auto: Press to set first six
strongest stations (if available) into
AM, FM1 or FM2 memory buttons;
press again to return to normal
stations.
9. Clock: Press to toggle between
station mode and clock mode. Press
and hold to set the clock. Press
the
SEEK to decrease hours or
SEEK to increase hours. Press
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
21
the TUNE to decrease minutes or TUNE to increase minutes. If
your vehicle has a stand alone clock this control will not function.
10. Balance: Press BAL; then press
SEL
/ to shift sound to the
left/right speakers.
Fade: Press FADE; then press
SEL
/ to shift sound to the
rear/front speakers.
11. Memory preset buttons: To
set a station: Select frequency band
AM/FM, tune to a station, press and
hold a preset button until sound returns.
12. Shuffle (CD): Press to play
tracks in random order. Press again
to disable.
13. Compression (CD): Press to
bring soft and loud passages
together for a more consistent
listening level. A small “c” will
appear in the display to indicate that compression is enabled. Press again
to disable.
14.
Dolby威 noise reduction:
Works in tape mode only. Reduces
tape noise and hiss; press to
activate/deactivate.
The Dolby威 noise reduction system is manufactured under license from
Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby威 and the double-D
symbol are registered trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing
Corporation.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
22
15. Side 1–2: Works in tape mode
only. Press to play reverse side of
the tape.
16. Fast Forward (FF): In CD
mode, press for a slow advance,
press and hold for a fast advance. In
TAPE mode, press FF to enable
Fast Forward feature. Press FF or TAPE to resume tape play.
17. Rewind (REW): In CD mode,
press for a slow reverse, press and
hold for a fast reverse. In TAPE
mode, press REW to enable the
rewind feature. Press REW or TAPE to resume tape play.
18. Select (SEL): Use with Bass,
Treble, Balance and Fade controls.
19. Bass: Press BASS; then press
SEL
/ to decrease/increase
the bass output.
Treble: Press TREB; then press
SEL
/ to decrease/increase
the treble output.
20. Tune: Works in radio mode only.
Press TUNE
/ to change
frequency down/up.
FF
2
REW
1
SEL
SEEK
TUNE
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
23
21. Seek: Press and release
SEEK
/ for previous/next
strong station, selection or track.
22. AM/FM: Press to select
AM/FM1/FM2 frequency band.
MACH姞 300 SATELLITE READY SOUND SYSTEM RADIO
(IF EQUIPPED)
1. Seek: Press and release
SEEK
/ for previous/next
strong station or track.
2. Rewind: In CD mode, press until
desired selection is reached.
Fast forward: In CD mode, press until desired selection is reached.
TEXT: TEXT is only available when equipped with Satellite radio. Your
Audiophile radio comes equipped with Satellite ready capability. The kit
to enable Satellite reception is available through your Ford dealer.
Detailed Satellite instructions are included with the dealer installed kit.
SEEK
TUNE
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
24
3. DSP (Digital Signal
Processing): Press DSP to access
the Ambiance menu. Ambiance gives
the feeling of “being there” to your
music, creating increased clarity as well as an open and spacious feel to
the music. Press SEL to engage/disengage. Turn the volume control to
increase/decrease the level of ambiance.
Occupancy: Press DSP again to change the occupancy mode to optimize
sound for:
• ALL SEATS — Enhances acoustic sound for all seating locations.
• DRIVER SEAT — Enhances acoustic sound for the driver. Rear seat
and passenger seat performance may be compromised in favor of the
driver.
• REAR SEAT - Enhances acoustic sound for the rear seat passengers.
4. Mute: Press to mute the playing
media.
5. Eject: Press EJ and choose the
corresponding preset (1–6) to eject
the desired CD. Press and hold to
eject all loaded discs.
6. Bass: Press BASS; then press
SEL
/ to decrease/increase
the bass output.
Treble: Press TREB; then press
SEL
/ to decrease/increase
the treble output.
7. Select: Use with Bass, Treble,
Balance and Fade controls to adjust
levels.
8. Balance: Press BAL; then press
SEL
/ to shift sound to the
right/left speakers.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
25
Fade: Press FADE; then press
SEL
/ to shift sound to the
front/rear speakers.
9. Menu: Press MENU and SEL to
access clock mode, RDS on/off,
Traffic, Program type, Show type
and Compression modes.
Setting the clock: Press MENU until SELECT HOUR or SELECT MINS
is displayed. Use SEL to manually increase (
) or decrease ( ) the
hours/minutes. Press MENU again to disengage clock mode.
Traffic: Allows you to hear traffic broadcasts. With the feature ON, press
SEEK or SCAN to find a station broadcasting a traffic report (if it is
broadcasting RDS data).Traffic information is not available in most
U.S. markets.
FIND Program type: Allows you to search RDS-equipped stations for a
certain category of music format: Classic, Country, Info, Jazz, Oldies,
R&B, Religious, Rock, Soft, Top 40.
Show TYPE: Displays the station’s call letters and format.
Compression: With a CD playing, press to bring soft and loud CD
passages together for a more consistent listening level when in CD mode.
Shuffle: With a CD playing, press to play tracks in a random order.
Press MENU until SHUF appears in the display. Use SEL to select SHUF
DISC, SHUF TRAC or SHUF OFF.
10. Memory presets: To set a
station: Select frequency band
AM/FM; tune to a station, press and
hold a preset button until sound
returns. In CD mode, press to access the desired disc.
11. SAT (if equipped): Your
Audiophile radio comes equipped
with Satellite Ready capability. The
kit to enable the Satellite reception is available through your Ford dealer.
Detailed satellite instructions are included with the dealer installed kit.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
26
12. AM/FM: Press to select AM/FM
frequency band.
Autoset: Allows you to set the
strongest local radio stations without losing your original manually set
preset stations for AM/FM1/FM2 . Press and momentarily hold AM/FM.
AUTOSET will flash on the display. When the six strongest stations are
filled, the station stored in preset 1 will begin playing. If there are less
than six strong stations, the system will store the last one in the
remaining presets. Press again to disengage.
13. Power/volume: Press to turn
ON/OFF; turn to increase or
decrease volume levels.
Speed sensitive volume (if equipped): Radio volume changes
automatically and slightly with vehicle speed to compensate for road and
wind noise. Recommended level is 1–3. Level 0 turns the feature off and
level 7 is the maximum setting.
Press and hold the volume control for five seconds. Then press SEL to
increase (
) or decrease ( ) the volume setting. The level will
appear in the display.
14. Load: Press LOAD and the
corresponding preset (1–6) to load a
CD into the desired slot. Press and
hold to load up to six discs at once.
15. CD AUX: Press to access CD or
AUX mode.
CD units are designed to play
commercially pressed 4.75 in (12 cm) audio compact discs only.
Due to technical incompatibility, certain recordable and
re-recordable compact discs may not function correctly when
used in Ford CD players. Irregular shaped CDs, CDs with a
scratch protection film attached, and CDs with homemade paper
(adhesive) labels should not be inserted into the CD player. The
label may peel and cause the CD to become jammed. It is
recommended that homemade CDs be identified with permanent
felt tip marker rather than adhesive labels. Ballpoint pens may
damage CDs. Please contact your dealer for further information.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
27
16. Scan: Press to move up the
radio frequency band. SCAN
automatically finds a station, plays it
for five seconds, then moves to the next station. Press again to stop.
CD: Press to sample CD selections for eight seconds. Press again to stop.
17. Disc/Tune: Radio: Press
or to manually tune down or up
the radio frequency band. CD:
Press
to select the previous disc or to select the next disc.
CAT: CAT is only available when equipped with Satellite Radio. Your
Audiophile radio comes equipped with Satellite ready capability. The kit
to enable Satellite reception is available through your Ford dealer.
Detailed Satellite instructions are included with the dealer installed kit.
18. CD door: Insert disc label side
up.
For information regarding SIRIUS
Satellite Radio, please call toll-free
888-539-SIRIUS (888-539-7474) or visit the SIRIUS website at
www.siriusradio.com
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
28
AM/FM STEREO IN-DASH SIX CD MODULAR AUDIO (IF EQUIPPED)
1. CD: To begin CD play, insert a
CD into the slot, label side up. The
system will auto-load the CD and
begin play after a short pause. The disc number and track number will
illuminate in the display.
If a CD is already loaded into the system, press CD to enter CD mode
and select the desired CD to play.
2. AUTO — SCAN:AUTO: Auto
memory tuning allows you to set
strong radio stations without loosing
your original manually set preset stations.
Press the AM or FM1/2 control to select a frequency. Press and
momentarily hold the AUTO-S control. The system will beep. When the
first six strong stations are filled, the strongest station will start playing.
Press AUTO-S to select from the stored stations. One stored station will
be selected and played each time the control is pressed. The frequency
and the channel number will be displayed.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
29
SCAN: Scan works in radio and CD mode. Press SCAN to hear a brief
sampling of all listenable stations on the frequency band or the first ten
seconds each track. Press SCAN again to stop.
3. Eject:Press to eject the CD
currently playing. Press CD plus the
preset number to eject a specific
CD. Press and hold to eject all CDs.
4. TUNE — MENU: Press to enter
Menu mode. Press repeatedly to
scroll through the following options:
Bass: Press the control until BASS
appears in the display. Turn the
control to increase/decrease the
level of bass.
Mid-range (if equipped): Press the control until MID appears in the
display. Turn the control to increase/decrease the level of mid-range.
Treble: Press the control until TREB appears in the display. Turn the
control to increase/decrease the level of treble.
Fade: Press the control until FADE appears in the display. Turn the
control to adjust the sound between the rear and front speakers.
Balance: Press the control until BAL appears in the display. Turn the
control to adjust the sound between the left and right speakers.
5. CLK: Press to alternate between
clock display and audio display.
Note: If the audio operation is
selected while the clock mode is on, the selected audio mode will be
displayed for ten seconds, then the display will revert to the clock mode.
Setting the clock: Press and hold CLK for approximately two seconds
until a beep is heard. The clock’s current time will flash. Press SCAN on
the hour set control (H) to set the hours. Press AUTO-S on the minute
set control (M) to adjust the minutes.
6. FF (Fast forward): In CD
mode, press and hold to advance
through a track at high speed.
7. REW (Rewind): In CD mode,
press and hold to reverse through a
track at high speed.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
30
8. SHUF (Shuffle): Press to play
all tracks on the current CD in
random order.
9. RPT (Repeat): Press to repeat
the current CD track. The track will
repeat continuously until RPT is
pressed again.
10. DISC
: Press to skip forward
to the beginning of the next CD.
11. DISC
: Press to skip back to
the beginning of the previous CD.
12. Memory presets: To set a
station: Select frequency band AM/FM; tune to a station, press and hold
a preset button until sound returns.
13. Volume/ON/OFF: Press to turn
ON/OFF. Turn to increase/decrease
the level of volume.
14. LOAD: The load feature allows
you to load up to six single CDs into
the audio system. Press LOAD. IN
will appear in the display when the system is ready. Insert the CD.
Autoload: To load up to six CDs into the system: Press and hold LOAD
until a beep is heard. When IN is displayed, insert the desired CD. When
IN is displayed again, insert the next CD. Continue until all six are
loaded (if desired).
15. SEEK — TRACK:In radio
mode, press to find the next (
)
or previous ( ) listenable station
on the frequency band.
In CD mode, press to listen the next (
) or previous ( ) track.
16. CD door: Insert CDs label side
up.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
31
17. FM 1/2: Press to enter FM
mode. Press to toggle between FM1
and FM2.
18. AM: Press to enter AM mode.
RADIO FREQUENCIES
AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC). Those frequencies are:
AM - 530, 540–1700, 1710 kHz
FM- 87.7, 87.9–107.7, 107.9 MHz
RADIO RECEPTION FACTORS
There are three factors that can affect radio reception:
• Distance/strength: The further you travel from an FM station, the
weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.
• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, power lines, electric fences,
traffic lights and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
• Station overload: When you pass a broadcast tower, a stronger signal
may overtake a weaker one and play while the weak station frequency
is displayed.
CASSETTE/PLAYER CARE
Do:
• Use only cassettes that are 90 minutes long or less.
• Tighten very loose tapes by inserting a finger or pencil into the hole
and turning the hub.
• Remove loose labels before inserting tapes.
• Allow tapes which have been subjected to extreme heat, humidity or
cold to reach a moderate temperature before playing.
• Clean the cassette player head with a cassette cleaning cartridge after
10–12 hours of play to maintain good sound/operation.
Don’t:
• Expose tapes to direct sunlight, extreme humidity, heat or cold.
• Leave tapes in the cassette player for a long time when not being
played.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
32
CD/CD PLAYER CARE
Do:
• Handle discs by their edges only. Never touch the playing surface.
• Inspect discs before playing. Clean only with an approved CD cleaner
and wipe from the center out.
Don’t:
• Expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods
of time.
• Insert more than one disc into each slot of the CD changer magazine.
• Clean using a circular motion.
CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4.75 in (12
cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility,
certain recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not
function correctly when used in Ford CD players. Irregular
shaped CDs, CDs with a scratch protection film attached, and CDs
with homemade paper (adhesive) labels should not be inserted
into the CD player. The label may peel and cause the CD to
become jammed. It is recommended that homemade CDs be
identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive
labels. Ball point pens may damage CDs. Please contact your
dealer for further information.
AUDIO SYSTEM WARRANTY AND SERVICE
Refer to the Warranty Guide for audio system warranty information. If
service is necessary, see your dealer or qualified technician.
VEHICLE NAVIGATION RADIO (VNR IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
Vehicle Navigation Radio (VNR)
which allows you to listen to the
radio, play CDs and also navigate
the vehicle using navigation CDs.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
33
Your Vehicle Navigation Radio is equipped with many different features
and controls. The labeled controls on the front face of the system (which
are called out below) are known as hard keys. The five blank controls
located under the MENU control are called soft keys. These controls are
labeled on the screen and can change functionality depending on which
screen is activated in the display. The hard keys will be explained further
below and the soft keys will be described as needed.
Safety information
Please read and follow all stated safety precautions. Failure to do
so may increase your risk of collision and personal injury.
Ford Motor Company shall not be liable for any damages of any
type arising from failure to follow these guidelines.
Do not attempt to service, repair or modify the system. See your Ford or
Lincoln Mercury dealer.
The driver must not attempt to operate any detailed operation of
the navigation system while the vehicle is in motion. Give full
attention to driving and to the road. Pull off the road and park in a
safe place before performing detailed operations.
A safety screen will be displayed
each time the navigation system is
turned on as a reminder. Ensure
that you are familiar with the
system’s features and functionality,
including the following:
• Do not turn the ignition key or start the engine while the software is
updating.
• Do not apply pressure to the display screen.
• The navigation system is not a substitute for your personal judgement.
• Route suggestions should not supersede local traffic regulations or
safe driving practices.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
34
• Do not follow route suggestions if they direct you to perform an
unsafe or illegal maneuver, would place you in an unsafe situation, or
would route you into an area that you consider unsafe.
• Drivers should not rely on screen displays while their vehicle is in
motion. Let the voice guide you. If viewing is necessary, pull off the
road to a safe location.
• Do not use the navigation system to locate emergency services.
• For road safety reasons, the driver should program the system only
when the vehicle is stationary. Certain functions will therefore not
operate while the vehicle is in motion.
• The navigation CD does not reflect road detours, closures or
construction, road characteristics such as rough road surface, slope or
grade, weight or height restrictions, traffic congestion, weather or
similar conditions.
• To use the system as effectively and safely as possible, obtain
up-to-date navigation CD’s whenever they become available.
• Set the volume level so that you can hear directions clearly.
• Do not disassemble or modify the system as this may lead to damage
and void your warranty. If a problem occurs, stop using the system
immediately and contact your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealer.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
35
System overview
1. CD slot: Insert an audio CD, label side up.
2. Eject: Press this control to eject
an audio CD or a navigation CD.
3. Navigation (NAV): Press the
NAV control to access the navigation
system menu.
4. MAP: The MAP control works in
all modes. Press to show current
location.
5. BACK: This control works only in
Navigation mode. Press to return to
the previous screen.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
36
6. ENTER: Use this control when
viewing a menu in the navigation
system. Press the control up or
down, left or right to highlight an
item in the display. Press the center
of the control to make your selection.
7. Memory presets: The memory
presets store favorite AM/FM
stations and allow you to access
various discs when in CD DJ mode. Press and hold a preset control until
PRESET SAVED appears in the display.
8. Current location: Press for
information on your current
location.
9. HOME: When the home location
is empty, pressing and holding this
key will store the vehicle’s current
location as home. Pressing the home
key after the home location has been set will calculate a route to that set
home location.
10. SEEK: Use these controls to
find the previous/next (
/ )
listenable radio station or advancing
tracks in CD mode.
11. Energy flow function: Press
for status of the engine and battery.
Refer to Energy Flow Screen later
in this chapter for further
information.
12. Fuel economy function: Push
to advance to the fuel economy
screen. The screen will show the
average fuel economy. Refer to Fuel economy function later in this
Chapter for further information.
13. AM/FM: Press to listen to the
AM or FM frequency band (AM,
FM1, FM2). Pressing AM/FM in
Navigation mode will return you to
the audio screen.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
37
Turn the control to adjust the audio
volume levels. To adjust the voice
output levels from the navigation
system, adjust the volume levels
only during voice output.
14. Phone (if equipped): If the
phone button is pressed and a
phone is not present, this will mute
the playing media.
15. On/volume: Press to turn the
system on, turn to adjust the
volume. Press again to turn the
system off.
16. CD: Press to enter CD mode or
to begin play of a CD that is already
loaded in the system. Press the CD
control again to toggle CD, CD DJ
and DVD (if equipped).
NOTE: Navigation CD’s are not operational in the CD DJ.
NOTE: To use the navigation system and listen to an audio CD, the
navigation CD must be loaded into the VNR and the audio CD must be
loaded into the CD DJ.
17. MENU: The MENU control
works in both the audio and
navigation mode. Press to access
various menus in both modes.
18. Soft keys: Press the correct
soft key to make selections with the
navigation system.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
38
Quick start – how to get going
To play a radio station:
1. Ensure that the ignition and the Vehicle Navigation Radio (VNR)
system are ON.
2. Press the AM/FM control to select
the desired frequency band.
3. Press the SEEK control to locate
a station.
To play a CD in the VNR:
1. Ensure that the ignition and the
VNR system are ON.
2. Insert a CD into the single slot of
the VNR and the CD will
automatically begin play. If a CD is already loaded into the system, press
the CD control.
To play a CD in the CD DJ:
1. Ensure that the ignition and the
VNR system are ON.
2. Insert CD(s) into the CD DJ
magazine. Insert magazine into CD
DJ. If the CD DJ magazine is already loaded, press the CD control to
toggle through CD and CD DJ.
3. Press the memory presets to
choose the desired disc in the CD
DJ.
4. Press the seek control to advance
to different tracks.
Note: Navigation CD’s are not operational in the CD DJ.
To use the Navigation system:
1. Ensure that the ignition and the VNR system are ON, and a map data
disc is inserted into the VNR CD slot.
Note: To use the navigation system and listen to an audio CD, the
navigation CD must be loaded into the VNR and the audio CD must be
loaded into the CD DJ.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
39
2. Press the NAV control to enter
into Navigation mode.
3. To enter a destination, ensure
that the vehicle is in the PARK position.
4. To navigate to home from the
current location, press HOME. If a
home location has not previously
been stored, pressing and holding
HOME will store the home location.
Energy Flow Screen
Your Vehicle Navigation System is equipped with an Energy Flow Screen.
This screen provides a graphical representation of how power is
transferred in the Hybrid system to either accelerate the vehicle, or
re-charge the battery. The screen also provides you with titles to
describe the mode which is currently active in the Hybrid system. These
screens are informational and do not require any input from you. Note
that due to the one second screen updates and the simplification of the
graphics, the display may not show the actual vehicle status.
To view the Energy Flow Screen,
press the battery icon. While the
display is activated, the audio will
continue to play.
1. Engine Power: This line
represents how much power is being
provided to the wheels by the
engine. The arrow will always flow
in one direction and point to the
wheels.
2. Engine: This icon represents the
Internal Combustion Engine (ICE).
It will be highlighted in orange only
when the ICE is running.
3. Generator Power: This line
represents how much power is being
generated by the engine for use by
the HV electric system, or how
much power is being used by the
HV electric system to control/start
the engine.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
40
4. HV Battery: This icon represents your High Voltage Battery. The fill
level (shown in green), represents the state of charge of the HV Battery
and will go up and down as the battery charges/discharges during normal
operation.
5. Battery Power: This line represents how much power the HV battery
is providing to accelerate the vehicle (discharging), or how much power
is being delivered back through the motor to the battery (charging).
6. Electric Motor: This icon represents the Hybrid Electric Motor. This
symbol will be highlighted in orange after the vehicle has been started
and will remain highlighted until key off to indicate that the vehicle is
ready to be driven.
7. Motor Power: This line represents how much power the electric
motor is delivering to the wheels (acceleration), or how much power is
being delivered back through the motor to charge the battery
(deceleration/braking.)
The energy flow screens contain a title to indicate what mode the Hybrid
system is in.
The vehicle is being powered by
both the electric motor and the
engine.
The vehicle is slowing down and
power is being stored in the high
voltage (HV) battery by the Hybrid
system.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
41
The vehicle is in a state similar to
idle, except that power is being
generated to recharge the high
voltage battery.
The vehicle is being powered by the
engine, not the electric motors. This
occurs at higher speeds.
The vehicle is either at rest, or is
sharing very little power between
the Hybrid parts. This can occur at
higher speeds if the vehicle is not
speeding up or slowing down.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
42
The vehicle is driving in electric
mode. (Power is coming from the
electric motors and not the engine).
Fuel economy screen
Your Vehicle Navigation Radio is
equipped with a Fuel economy
screen. To view, press the fuel icon
control. This screen displays three pieces of information:
• Instantaneous Fuel Economy
(IFE): The IFE is displayed on
the vertical bar on the left of the
screen ranging from 0 mpg up to
MAX, which indicates excellent
fuel economy. Your vehicle must
be moving to calculate
instantaneous fuel economy.
When the vehicle is not moving,
the IFE function will display no
bar on the IFE graph indicating
0 mpg. Conversely, if you are driving in electric mode (Engine off),
this function will display MAX. IFE cannot be reset.
• Average Fuel Economy (AFE): The AFE is displayed on the white
bar across the graph. The AFE will be retained when the key is turned
OFF, and will continue averaging when driving resumes. Pressing
RESET will reset the AFE to zero.
• One minute average graph: The graph is updated each minute with
the fuel economy that was achieved during the prior minute of driving.
Each new one minute average will be added to the left side of the
graph, shifting the past data to the right. When the graph area is full,
the right most point will be deleted, keeping a running scroll from left
to right of the last 15 minutes of driving. The graph is intended to
provide a graphical representation of how driving habits/conditions can
affect fuel economy. Note that the graph will be cleared anytime the
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
43
key is turned out of RUN (however, the average fuel economy bar will
retain its value). Press RESET to clear the graph.
If the Navigation System has been set to units of Kilometer, the Fuel
Economy Screen will display the equivalent Consumption Graph in units of
L/100KM. In Consumption (L/100KM) mode, the IFE function will display
MAX until the vehicle is moving. For more information on Average Fuel
Economy, refer to Message Center in the Driver ControlsChapter.
Audio features
Your Vehicle Navigation Radio has many features including a full range of
audio functions.
Audio screen display
When in audio mode, there are various indicators which will appear on
the display.
1. Station name
2. Station frequency
3. Stereo indicator
4. Preset selected
5. Band selected
6. Music type (when instructed by
the system).
If the navigation system is activated during radio or CD playback (CD DJ),
audio output continues but route guidance screens will appear in the display.
Volume/power control
Press the control to turn the
audio/navigation system on or off.
Turn the control to raise or lower volume. The levels will be displayed on
the screen.
To adjust the navigation voice output level, adjust the volume
control only when the navigation system is speaking. Otherwise,
it will adjust the radio levels.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
44
Automatic volume control (AVC)
With this feature, radio volume changes automatically with vehicle speed
to compensate for road and wind noise. To engage the AVC feature:
1. Press the MENU control.
2. Select AUDIO OPTIONS.
3. Select AVC, TRAFFIC, DSP.
4. Select AVC.
5. Use the cursor control to increase
or decrease the levels. The higher
the level selected, the greater the
compensation. The levels will be
shown in the display. Decrease all
the way to the left to turn AVC off.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
45
AM/FM select
The AM/FM control works in radio,
CD and navigation modes.
AM/FM select in radio mode
This control allows you to select AM or FM frequency bands. Press the
control to switch between AM, FM1 or FM2 memory preset stations.
AM/FM select in CD mode
Press to stop CD play and begin radio play.
Radio reception factors:
• Distance/strength. The further an FM signal travels, the weaker it is.
The listenable range of the average FM station is approximately 40 km
(24 miles). This range can be affected by “signal modulation.” Signal
modulation is a process radio stations use to increase their
strength/volume relative to other stations.
• Terrain. Hills, mountains and tall buildings between your vehicle’s
antenna and the radio station signal can cause FM reception problems.
Static can be caused on AM stations by power lines, electric fences,
traffic lights and thunderstorms. Moving away from an interfering
structure (out of its “shadow”) returns your reception to normal.
• Station overload. Weak signals are sometimes captured by stronger
signals when you pass a broadcast tower. A stronger signal may
temporarily overtake a weaker signal and play while the weak station
frequency is displayed.
AM/FM select in navigation mode
Press once when in navigation mode to return to the audio screen (while
the navigation function continues to work in the background). Press
again to enter AM/FM mode where you are able to make frequency band
adjustments.
CD select
To begin CD play (if a CD is already
loaded), press the CD control. The
first track of the disc will begin
playing. After that, CD play will
begin where it stopped last. Press the CD control again to toggle
between CD and CD DJ modes.
If a navigation CD is in the head unit and you press CD, the system will
automatically search for an audio CD in the CD DJ and begin play if it is
present.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
46
Adjusting the levels
1. Press the MENU control.
2. Select the AUDIO OPTIONS soft
key.
3. Select BASS, TREB (Treble), BAL
(Balance) or FADE.
The bass adjust allows you to
increase or decrease the audio
system’s bass output.
The treble adjust control allows you
to raise or lower the audio system’s
treble output.
The balance feature allows sound distribution to be adjusted between the
right and left speakers.
Speaker sound can be adjusted between the front and rear speakers
using the fade feature.
4. Use the cursor control to increase
or lower the bass and treble levels
or to adjust the sound between the
front and rear or between the left
and right speakers.
DSP (Digital Signal Processing)
The Digital Signal Processing (DSP) feature allows you to change the
signal mode to suit your listening tastes.
Press the soft key to turn the feature on or off.
This feature can be accessed by selecting the menu option “More. . .
AVC, Traffic, DSP. . .” within the “Audio Options” menu.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
47
You can then select the following
signal modes:
• JAZZ CLUB — jazz club with
clearly reflected sounds
• HALL — rectangular concert hall
capacity of about 2,000
• CHURCH — church with a high
vault
• STADIUM — outdoor stadium with a capacity of about 30,000
• NEWS —“voice-only” type of sound with a limited audio band
This system has three “occupancy modes” of listening:
• DRIVER— Optimizes audio playback for the drivers seat position.
• ALL — Optimizes audio playback to be similar for ALL seating
positions.
• REAR — Optimizes the audio playback for rear seat passengers.
Rewind/fast forward
Press the
and controls
to fast forward or rewind a CD
track.
Seek function
The SEEK control works in all
modes.
Seek in radio mode
• Press
to find the next listenable station down the frequency band.
• Press
to find the next listenable station up the frequency band.
Seek in CD or CD DJ mode
• Press
to seek to the previous track of the current disc. If a
selection has been playing for three seconds or more and you
press
, the CD changer will replay that selection from the
beginning.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
48
• Press to seek forward to the next track of the current disc. After
the last track has been completed, the first track of the current disc
will automatically replay.
Seek in navigation mode
• Press
or to access the next audio station if in radio mode, and
next track if in CD mode.
Radio station memory preset
The radio is equipped with six station memory preset controls. These
controls can be used to select up to six preset AM stations and twelve
FM stations (six in FM1 and six in FM2).
The presets will also allow you to access CDs which are loaded in the CD
DJ. When in CD mode, simply press the preset number which
corresponds to the desired disc.
Setting memory preset stations
1. Select the frequency band with the AM/FM select control.
2. Select a station. Refer to Tune adjust or Seek function for more
information on selecting a station.
3. Press and hold a memory preset
control until PRESET SAVED
appears on the display.
Autoset memory preset
Autoset allows you to set strong radio stations without losing your
original manually set preset stations. This feature is helpful on trips
when you travel between cities with different radio stations.
Starting autoset memory preset
1. Select a frequency band using the AM/FM select controls.
2. Press the AUTO control.
3. When the first six strong stations
are filled, the station stored in
memory preset control 1 will start
playing.
If there are less than six strong
stations available on the frequency
band, the remaining memory preset
controls will all store the last strong station available.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
49
Any preset stored via the presets directly (pressing and holding) in this
mode are temporary.
A message will indicate whenever a temporary preset is stored or
recalled. This mode is active while the AUTO soft key is highlighted.
To deactivate autoset and return to your audio system’s manually set
memory stations, press the AUTO control again.
Tune adjust
The tune feature works in radio
mode.
• Select the TUNE soft key.
• Press SEEK to go up
or
down the frequency band
manually.
Stereo indicator
Whenever a stereo signal is received in radio mode, the stereo indicator
(ST) will appear in the display.
Scan function
Press the soft key next to SCAN for
a brief sampling of all listenable
stations on the selected frequency.
Press again to disable scan and
remain on the current station.
Program type (PTY) selections
Some FM stations transmit program
type codes which can be used to
locate different stations transmitting
programs of a certain type.
Press the soft key next to TYPE to
access a list of available program
types.
Use the cursor control to select the
desired program type. The system will search for and begin playing that
program type if available. During a seek or scan and for 10 seconds after
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
50
a station is found, pressing the seek up/down or scan will initiate another
search. If the desired type cannot be found, “Not Found” appears in the
display and the audio system returns to the original station.
Traffic information
The Traffic information soft key can be accessed under menu option
“MORE...AVC,Traffic, DSP...” within the “AUDIO OPTIONS” menu.
Select the TRAF soft key to select traffic information broadcast from
certain stations which will automatically interrupt radio or CD playback
at a preset volume level. The default Traffic volume can be adjusted with
the slider bar using the cursor input. Moving the position to the left most
position will turn this feature off.
The display TRAF will appear in Orange if the feature is enabled, but
there is no broadcast traffic program available.
Traffic information is not available in most U.S. markets.
Compression
The compression feature will boost
quieter music and lower louder
music to minimize the need for
volume adjustments.
When in CD or CD DJ mode, press
COMP to engage or disengage the
compression feature.
Shuffle
When in CD or CD DJ mode, press
SHUF to engage and disengage the
shuffle feature. All tracks on the
current disc will be played in
random order.
CD DJ
Your vehicle is equipped with a CD DJ (CD changer). It is located under
the passenger seat.
Radio power must be turned on to play the CDs in the CD DJ. The
magazine may be stored in the glove box when not being used.
The CD magazine may be inserted or ejected with the radio power off.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
51
ONLY use the magazine supplied with the CD DJ, other types will
damage the unit.
Keep the CD DJ door closed. Coins and foreign objects will damage the
CD player and void your audio system warranty.
The CD magazine does not have to be full (all 6 disks) for the CD DJ to
function.
CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4.75 in (12
cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility,
certain recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not
function correctly when used in Ford CD players. Irregular
shaped CDs, CDs with a scratch protection film attached, and CDs
with homemade paper (adhesive) labels should not be inserted
into the CD player. The label may peel and cause the CD to
become jammed. It is recommended that homemade CDs be
identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive
labels. Ball point pens may damage CDs. Please contact your
dealer for further information.
To access the CD DJ:
Slide the door to access the CD DJ
magazine.
Press
to eject the magazine.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
52
1. Pull the lever to remove a CD
tray from the magazine.
2. Insert one disc into each CD tray
of the magazine (up to 6 discs).
Ensure that the label side is facing
up.
If you pull too hard on the disc
holder, the disc holder may come
completely out of the magazine. If
this happens, reinsert the disc
holder back into the magazine.
3. Insert each CD tray, with the disc
loaded, all the way into the CD
magazine.
4. Insert the CD magazine into the
CD DJ.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
53
5. Slide the door to the left to close.
Use only compact discs containing
this mark.
The magazine does not need to be full for the CD DJ to operate.
Radio power must be turned on to play the CDs in the CD DJ. The
magazine may be stored in the glove compartment when not being used.
The CD magazine may be inserted or ejected with the radio power off.
Ensure that the disc holder is
evenly inserted and at the same
level as the magazine (A). The unit
will not operate if the disc holder is
not inserted at the same level (B).
CD DJ information screen
The CD DJ screen will display
various information such as:
• Track selected
• Elapsed time
• Selected disc
• Volume level
• On-screen selections
A
B
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
54
CD DJ playback
With a navigation CD inserted into
the audio unit, press CD for CD DJ
playback. Without a navigation CD
inserted into the audio unit, press
CD until CD DJ appears in the display.
If playback is selected and the CD DJ is empty or the magazine is
missing or incorrectly inserted, NO DISC (S) will appear in the display.
If the selected CD is missing, NO DISC is displayed and the unit selects
the next available disc. The audio unit remembers which discs are
available, so it will not select a disc that it knows is missing. Instead, NO
DISC appears in the display and the current disc remains selected.
If the selected CD is damaged or upside down, CHECK DISCS and the
disc number are displayed. The unit then selects the next available disc.
During normal operations, CDs and tracks are played sequentially in
ascending order. Playback continues at track one if the end of a disc is
reached and with CD DJ playback, disc one will follow disc six.
Rewind/fast forward feature
When in CD DJ mode, press and
hold the
or control to
search forward or in reverse on the
current disc.
Scan feature
When in CD DJ mode, press SCAN
for a brief sampling of all tracks on
the current CD. Press again to
disengage the feature and listen to
the selected song.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
55
Shuffle mode
When in CD DJ mode, press SHUF
to engage and disengage the shuffle
feature. The tracks will be played in
random order. The unit will play all
the tracks on the selected disc and
then move onto the other discs and
play the tracks in random order.
Compression
The compression feature will boost quieter music and lower louder music
to minimize the need for volume adjustments.
When in CD DJ mode, press COMP
to engage or disengage the
compression feature.
Navigation features
The route guidance navigation system in your audio unit will not function
unless a navigation CD is inserted.
Ensure that you follow highway code restrictions and do not take
any risks. For example, if you are unable to make a U-turn,
continue on your journey. The navigation system will recalculate
your route to get you back to an appropriate road to your
destination.
For road safety reasons, information should only be entered
when the vehicle is stationary.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
56
Please drive safely
This screen may appear on your
VNR display. Press the soft key next
to the display to select the desired
language. Press the control next to
ACCEPT to confirm your selection.
Navigation screen display
When in navigation mode, there will
be various indicators on the screen
to help you in operating your
system.
1. Direction to destination
2. Distance to final destination
3. Estimated time to destination
4. Current directional heading and
GPS signal strength (color)
5. Vehicle icon (current vehicle position)
6. ZOOM
7. PAN
8. DETOUR
9. VOICE
Principles of GPS (Global Positioning System) operation
Your Vehicle Navigation System directs you based on information derived
from satellites, road maps stored on the CD, sensors in your vehicle and
the desired destination. The system compiles all necessary information to
guide you to your selected destination. Space satellites determine the
vehicle’s current location and transmit position and time signals to your
car.
If the vehicle has been parked for a long period of time, the navigation
function may be temporarily unresponsive. The navigation system will
operate reliably again once GPS reception is available in a few minutes.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
57
Limited GPS reception
System performance may be adversely affected if GPS reception is
interrupted or interference occurs over a distance of several miles. The
following are possible causes for GPS reception being interrupted. If the
vehicle is:
• in multi-story parking garages
• in tunnels and under bridges
• in between high buildings
• by forests or tree-lined avenues
• in heavy rain showers and thunderstorms
• in valleys and in mountainous regions
The GPS signal strength may vary. The directional heading indicator at
the bottom of the screen might change color to indicate this signal
strength. The colors are as follows:
• Green — A clear GPS signal is being received.
• Yellow — The GPS signal is partially blocked.
• Red — The GPS signal is unavailable and may be temporarily blocked.
Note: After an ignition cycle, the system must connect to a satellite
signal to get the time for the display.
To enter navigation mode
Press NAV to access the navigation
system menu.
Use the cursor control, or the
corresponding soft key to confirm
your selection.
If you select the wrong item, press
the BACK control to return to the
previous screen. Or, press NAV to return to the main Destination Entry
menu and start again.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
58
Map display information
When using the navigation system,
the map display screen will appear
to guide you to your location. On
the screen, you are able to make the
following choices:
• VOICE — Press to repeat the last
voice prompt.
• DETOUR — Press to select a
detour from your current navigation route.
• PAN — Press to move the current view of the map.
• ZOOM — Press to adjust the area covered on the map display. The
map zoom levels are:
1
⁄
8
,
1
⁄
2
, 1, 4, and 16 miles.
Selecting a destination
Press NAV to access the destination
entry menu.
From this menu, you may select
from the following options:
• Address/Intersection – Use to
select a destination based on a
known street address or
intersection. Not available
when the vehicle is moving.
• Point of Interest – Use to select
a destination that is a point of interest location (i.e., airport,
restaurant, hospital). Not available when the vehicle is moving.
• Previous Destination – Use to select a destination from the last 50
destinations entered.
• Address Book – Use to select a destination from previously stored
entries.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
59
Address/Intersection
Use the soft keys to select
Address/Intersection from the
Destination Entry menu. The next
two options available are:
• Town/City Name – Select this
option if you know the town or
city name.
• Street Name – Select if you
know the street address but are uncertain of the city.
The next two options are:
• Address range – Select the numerical address of the destination.
• Intersection – Select the intersection closest to the destination.
Note: The intersection function is not available when the vehicle is
moving.
Points of Interest (POI)
This destination option enables you
to specify a particular place, such as
an airport or gas station. Use the
soft keys to select Points of Interest.
In the next menu, you will have the
following options:
• By Category – Lists POIs by
categories, such as airports, gas
stations, etc. Use the cursor
control to select and confirm
choice.
• By Name – A keyboard display
enables you to spell out the first
four letters of the desired POI. A
slight time delay will occur if large numbers of letter options are
available.
• By Category & Name – Lists categories, then allows you to spell out
the first four letters of your destination.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
60
After making these selections, three further options are displayed:
• Show All – Lists entries in alphabetical order.
• Sort by Distance – Lists the closest POI entries to the vehicle’s
current location.
• Within a Town/City – Lists entries for a specific city in alphabetical
order.
Note: The intersection function is not available when the vehicle is
moving.
Certain categories may not be available in some areas and POIs may not
all be listed. Up to date information also depends upon using the latest
navigation CD available.
Previous destination
The last 50 destinations entered into
the navigation system are
automatically stored in the system’s
memory.
Use the soft key to select Previous
Destination. The address of each
stored destination will appear.
The previous origin information is
also stored in this location. This stores the location where the vehicle
last started off from and is updated each time the vehicle completes a
journey.
Deleting a previous destination
• Use the cursor control to select
the destination to be deleted.
• Press DELETE.
A confirmation screen will appear
before the deletion is complete.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
61
Entering a destination using the keyboard of lists
After selecting the desired choice
from the Destination Entry menu,
there are two main ways to enter
your destination in the VNR system:
Keyboard – the keyboard display
enables you to spell out a town, city,
street or point of interest.
• Use the cursor control to
highlight the desired character(s).
• Push in the control to confirm the selection. A highlight bar will
automatically begin searching the current files for the listing.
• To move back to previously selected characters, press DELETE.
List – Your VNR system shows a list of town/cities, streets or points of
interest and a highlight bar indicates the line selected. You may choose
any of these for a destination.
• Press LIST to enter list mode.
• Use the cursor control to scroll through the selections.
• Press in the cursor control to confirm the selection.
Selecting Route Criteria
Once you have selected a
destination, select from the
following route criteria:
1. Shortest time route — Creates a driving route which minimizes
driving time taking into consideration things such as speed limits,
number of turns, etc.
2. Shortest distance — Creates a driving route the shortest distance
from the current location.
3. Avoid toll roads — Creates a driving route which avoids toll roads
where possible.
4. Avoid freeways — Creates a driving route which avoids major
freeways where possible.
5. Use freeways — Creates a route which uses freeways where possible.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
62
Route calculation
Once the route criteria is selected, the navigation system automatically
calculates a route to the selected destination. The route appears on the
display screen and a voice prompt provides instructions.
This screen will appear for a few
seconds while the navigation system
is calculating your route.
Please proceed
Once the route is calculated, “Please
Proceed” is displayed with a map on
the display. Also included in the
display:
• the planned route is shown in
pink
• parts of the planned route
containing incomplete map data
are highlighted in “cautionary” yellow
• major roadways are shown in blue
• other streets are shown in white
• your vehicle location is shown as a pink/yellow triangle
• the arrow at the foot of the screen points to your destination
You are able to choose from three viewing options in this display:
• PLAN — Press this soft key to scroll through your entire route. This
option is only available prior to beginning the journey.
• PAN — Press this soft key, then use the cursor control to pan up,
down, left or right on the map. This option is only available when the
vehicle is not in motion.
• ZOOM — Press this soft key multiple times (or use the cursor input)
to select the desired zoom level on the map. The zoom level is shown
at the bottom of the screen.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
63
Guide display
Once your vehicle is moving along
the highlighted route, the Guide
display screen will automatically
appear. This screen shows your next
turn as voice prompts direct you on
the route. When the planned route
contains incomplete map data, the
guide display maneuvers are
identified in “cautionary” yellow. The screens and voice prompts are
continually updated to correspond with your vehicle location. To
disengage the voice prompts, refer to Navigation preferences in the
System Options section.
If you are turning onto a road with incomplete map data, the turn icon
will be highlighted in a “cautionary” yellow. If the next maneuver is
desired, press the cursor control down.
The voice volume level may be adjusted by turning the volume control
during a voice prompt only.
On the Guide display screen, there are two display functions which are
available if needed:
• VOICE — Press to repeat the current voice prompt.
• DETOUR — Press to select a detour. For more information on
detours, refer to Detours, interruptions and route changes in this
chapter.
• CANCEL — Press to cancel the guide display.
While in the Guide display screen, the cursor input can be used to
preview future/up coming maneuvers. This can be done by pressing
down on the cursor input to go to the ’next’ maneuver instruction, and
pressing up to go to the ’previous’ maneuver. Pressing the NAV control at
any time will set you back to the current maneuver/turn instruction.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
64
True view
As you approach an intersection, the
Guide display screen will
automatically change to a close-up
view (True view) of the junction.
The close-up view will automatically
return to the Guide display screen
once a turn has been completed.
When the planned route contains incomplete map data, the close-up view
maneuvers are identified in “cautionary” yellow.
Arrival
When you approach your
destination, the destination indicator
will appear on the map display
screen as a circular icon. When you
arrive, the name and address of
your destination will be displayed.
Navigation screen display
The address book feature allows you
to store up to 50 alphabetical
destinations. To store an address:
1. Once in navigation mode, select
“Address book”.
2. Confirm the selection.
Stored addresses will appear in the
display. If no entries exist, an empty address book screen is shown.
Use the cursor control to select the desired entry.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
65
Adding, deleting or editing the address book
Note: These features are not available when the vehicle is in motion.
1. Ensure that you are in navigation
mode.
2. Select Address book.
3. Confirm selection.
4. Press the DELETE soft key to
delete the current entry.
5. Press the ADD soft key to add an
additional entry.
6. Press the EDIT soft key to edit
the current entry.
• Use the cursor control to select a
letter.
• Push the control to add a letter
to the name. If you make a
mistake, you can press the
DELETE soft key.
• Press the DONE soft key to save your entry under the name you
spelled.
Storing the current car position in the address book
If you are at a location you would
like to store in the address book,
such as a new restaurant:
• Select ADDRESS BOOK from the
Destination Entry menu.
• Press the ADD soft key.
• Press the CURRENT LOCATION
soft key.
• Assign a name to the entry as described in Adding, deleting or
editing the address book above.
• Press the DONE soft key to save your entry under the name you
chose.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
66
Current location
To access your current location,
press this when in navigation mode.
Your current location and the
name/distance to the next/last
intersection are displayed.
Press NAV to return to a guidance display. Press MAP to return to a map
display.
Detours, route interruptions and changes
If need be, your navigation system
can easily and quickly find the most
efficient detour around road
construction, unexpected traffic or
undesirable roads.
Detour options
You may engage the detour option
when in the Guide display, True
view or Map display screens.
Press the control next to DETOUR
to activate.
Use the soft keys to select and enter
your new route criteria. Press the
key to confirm selection. The
following options are available:
• AVOID CURRENT ROAD — Updates your route to avoid the road
which you are on currently.
• AVOID NEXT ROAD — Updates your route to avoid the next road
planned on your journey.
• DETOUR (X) MILES — Provides a detour from the current route for
the noted distance. Use the cursor control to indicate the distance
which needs to be avoided. The range available is based on the length
of your original route.
• AVOID SPECIFIC ROAD — Avoids a specific road on your planned
route.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
67
Route interruptions
In the course of your destination, you may decide to temporarily leave
your planned route for gas, food, etc. If you turn off the ignition, the
option to continue the route guidance will be displayed when the ignition
is turned on again. Use the cursor control to select from one of the
following options:
• Resume route - The navigation
system displays the Select Route
Criteria screen. Refer to
Selecting Route Criteria earlier
in this chapter.
• Cancel route - Press to return to
the main menu.
If the ignition is not turned off,
simply continue along your highlighted route.
Route changes or cancellations
To cancel or change your current
route:
• Press BACK, then select “Cancel
Guidance” or
• Press the CANCEL soft key.
Navigation Menu
You are able to make various
adjustments in navigation mode. To
view the options, press the control
next to “Option Menu” to select
from the following options:
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
68
Navigation options
Once in the navigation preference
menu, you may select from the
following options:
• VOICE — Select to turn the voice
output on or off and to adjust the
volume level.
• MAP — Choose between
“Heading up” to put your
direction of travel toward the top of the screen, or “North up” to
ensure that North is always at the top of the screen.
• UNITS — Press to select from miles or kilometers. When Km are
selected, it will affect the map and the fuel economy screen.
Display options
Use this feature to change the
display setting. This feature can be
accessed by selecting “Display
Options” within the Main Menu.
Use the cursor control to select one
of the following options:
• MODE — auto (automatic), day
or night display settings.
• BRIGHTNESS— provides manual adjustment for screen brightness.
• Turn Display Off— Select turn the display off. Press any button to
turn the display back on again.
System options
• Language Selection: Use the
cursor control to select and enter
the desired voice and text
language.
• Clock Setting: Your vehicle is equipped with your clock in the VNR
system. To set the clock:
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
69
1. Access the CLOCK screen.
2. Press the ADJUST control to
select the hours or minutes to set.
3. Use the cursor control to increase
or decrease the hours or minutes.
4. Press DONE to set the time.
5. Select the SET soft key to
synchronize/set the minutes and
seconds to GPS time. The hours will remain at the user set value.
You may choose to set the clock to a 12 or 24 hour display.
General information
Federal Communication Commission (FCC) Compliance
Changes or modifications not approved by Ford or Lincoln Mercury could
void user’s authority to operate the equipment. This equipment has been
tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference
to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to consult the dealer or an
experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Cleaning the display
Do not spray cleaning fluid directly onto the unit. Instead, spray onto a
soft cloth and gently wipe the unit. Only recommended products should
be used.
Do not clean any part of the system with benzene, paint thinner or any
other solvent.
Do not spill liquids of any kind onto the unit.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
70
The navigation system utilizes a database stored in a special format on a
CD. It is recommended always to use the latest update of this map CD.
• The navigation system will only work with CDs specifically intended
for your navigation system.
• Always store the map CDs in their protective cases when not in use.
Map coverage
The following map data CDs are available for the navigation system:
• CD1: California/Nevada/Hawaii
• CD2: Northwest/Southwest
• CD3: North Central
• CD4: South Central
• CD5: Midwest
• CD6: Ohio Valley
• CD7: New England
• CD8: Mid Atlantic
• CD9: Southeast
• CD10: Canada
CDs contain map data for all of the continental United States and parts of
Canada. In some less populated areas, even though a map is displayed, map
data may be incomplete (does not contain one-way street information, turn
restrictions, speed limits, etc.) In these cases, the system will alert the
driver and route guidance directions on the display are highlighted in
“cautionary” yellow.
Ordering additional map CDs
If you wish to order additional maps, or report possible problems with
your current map CD, please call NAVTEQ at 1–(888) NAV-MAPS,
(1–888–628–6277) toll-free or write
NAVTEQ
P.O. Box 543442
Chicago, IL 60654–0442
Website — www.navteq.com
Latest map CDs
The traffic network is constantly changing due to new roads, traffic
restrictions, etc. Therefore, it is not always possible to exactly match the
digital CD map with the current roadways. To help with accuracy, always
use the latest version of the map CD for navigation.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
71
MANUAL HEATING AND AIR
CONDITIONING SYSTEM
1. Fan speed adjustment: Controls
the volume of air circulated in the
vehicle.
2. Air flow selections: Controls
the direction of the airflow in the
vehicle. See the following for a brief
description on each control.
MAX A/C: Uses recirculated air to cool the vehicle. Air flows from the
instrument panel vents only. Note: With the climate system set to MAX
A/C, defrost or defrost/floor mode (the orange graphic on your climate
control) the engine will run continuously, reducing fuel economy.
A/C: Uses outside air to cool the vehicle. Air flows from the instrument
panel vents only. Note: When A/C mode is selected, you may notice the
air temperature cycle from cooler to warmer as the engine turns on and
off.
A/C
: Uses recirculated air to cool the vehicle. Air flows from the
instrument panel vents only. Note: When A/C
mode is selected,
you may notice the air temperature cycle from cooler to warmer as the
engine turns on and off.
: Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents.
O (OFF): Outside air is shut out and the fan will not operate.
: Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents and the
floor vents.
: Distributes outside air through the floor vents.
: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents and
floor vents. The air conditioner will automatically turn on to dehumidify
the air.
Note: With the climate system set to
(defrost/floor) mode, the
engine will run continuously, reducing fuel economy.
: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents. The
air conditioner will automatically turn on to dehumidify the air.
Note: With the climate system set to
(defrost) mode, the engine
will run continuously, reducing fuel economy.
3. Temperature selection: Controls the temperature of the airflow in
the vehicle.
1
2
3
4
2
1 3
A/C
A/C
MAX
A/C
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Climate Controls
Climate Controls
72
Operating tips
• To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather, place
the air flow selector in the
position.
• To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle: do not drive with the
air flow selector in the OFF or MAX A/C position.
• Under normal weather conditions, do not leave the air flow selector in
MAX A/C or OFF when the vehicle is parked. This allows the vehicle
to “breathe” using the outside air inlet vents.
• Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the
airflow to the back seats.
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of
the windshield.
To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather:
1. Select A/C.
2. Modulate the temperature control to maintain comfort.
3. Set the fan speed to 4.
4. Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows.
To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents, close the vents
located in the middle of the instrument panel.
Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel as these
objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop.
REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER
The rear defroster control is located
on the instrument panel. Press to
clear the rear window of thin ice
and fog. The small LED will
illuminate when activated.
Ensure that the ignition is in the 3 (RUN) position in order to operate
the rear window defroster.
The defroster turns off automatically after 15 minutes or when the
ignition is turned to the 1 (LOCK) position. To manually turn off the
defroster before 15 minutes have passed, push the control a second time.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Climate Controls
73
HEADLAMP CONTROL
Rotate the headlamp control to the
first position
to turn on the
parking lamps. Rotate to the second
position
to also turn on the
headlamps.
HEADLAMP BATTERY SAVER
The battery saver will shut off the exterior lamps 10 minutes after the
ignition switch has been turned off if the headlamp control is in
the
position. The system will not shut off the parking lamps if the
headlamp control is in the
position.
Autolamp control (if equipped)
The autolamp system sets the
headlamps to turn on and off
automatically. The autolamp control,
located on the headlamp switch,
will:
• turn on the lamps automatically
at night
• turn off the lamps automatically
during the daylight
• keep the lamps on for up to three minutes after the key is turned to
OFF.
See Autolamp delay system (if equipped) to set the auto headlamp off
delay time.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Lights
Lights
74
Autolamp delay system (if equipped)
If your vehicle has an autolamp delay feature, you can set the delay time
to keep the headlights on for up to three minutes after the key is turned
OFF. The delay time is set to 20 seconds at the factory, but the delay
time may be changed by following the steps below (steps 1 through 6
must be done within 10 seconds):
1. Turn the key to the 1 (LOCK)
position.
2. Rotate the headlamp control to
the autolamp position.
3. Rotate the headlamp control to
the OFF position.
4. Turn the key to the 3 (RUN)
position.
5. Turn the key back to the 1
(LOCK) position.
6. Turn the headlamp control to the autolamp position (the headlights
should turn on).
7. Turn the headlamp control to the OFF position when the desired
delay time (up to 3 minutes) has been reached.
Foglamp control (if equipped)
Press the foglamp control, located
on the instrument panel, to activate
the foglamps. The foglamp LED will
illuminate when the foglamps are
on. Press the foglamp control to
deactivate the foglamps.
The foglamps will only operate with
the parking lamps or headlamps on.
When the highbeams are activated, the foglamps will not operate.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Lights
75
Daytime running lamps (DRL) (if equipped)
Turns the lowbeam headlamps on with a reduced output.
To activate:
• the ignition must be in the 3 (RUN) position.
• the headlamp control must be in the OFF, parking lamps or autolamp
position.
• the parking brake must be released.
Always remember to turn on your headlamps at dusk or during
inclement weather. The Daytime Running Lamp (DRL) system
does not activate the tail lamps and generally may not provide
adequate lighting during these conditions. Failure to activate your
headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision.
Smart park lamps (if equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with the DRL and autolamp features, your
park lamps will turn on automatically when lighting conditions are dark
and DRLs are activated (the headlamp control is in the OFF position).
High beams
Push the lever toward the
instrument panel to activate. Pull
the lever towards you to deactivate.
Flash to pass
Pull toward you slightly to activate
and release to deactivate.
OFF
OFF
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Lights
76
PANEL DIMMER CONTROL
Use to adjust the brightness of the instrument panel.
• Push and hold top of control to
brighten.
• Push and hold bottom of control
to dim.
AIMING THE HEADLAMPS
The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed at the assembly plant.
If your vehicle has been in an accident the alignment of your headlamps
should be checked by a qualified service technician.
Vertical aim adjustment
1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a wall or screen on a level surface,
approximately 25 feet (7.6 meters) away.
• (1) Eight feet
• (2) Center height of lamp to ground
• (3) Twenty five feet
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Lights
77
• (4) Horizontal reference line
2. Measure the height from the center of your headlamp to the ground
and mark an 8 foot (2.4 meter) horizontal reference line on the vertical
wall or screen at this height (a piece of masking tape works well). The
center of the lamp is marked by a 3.0 mm circle on the headlamp lens.
3. Turn on the low beam headlamps to illuminate the wall or screen and
open the hood. Cover the left-hand headlamp with an opaque cloth.
4. On the wall or screen you will
observe a light pattern with a
distinct horizontal edge of high
intensity light towards the right. If
this edge is not at the horizontal
reference line, the beam will need to
be adjusted.
5. Locate the vertical adjuster on
the headlamp, then usea4mm
socket to turn the adjuster either
counterclockwise (to adjust down)
or clockwise (to adjust up) aligning
the upper edge of the light pattern
to the horizontal line.
6. Move the opaque cloth to cover
the right-hand headlamp and repeat
steps 4 and 5 for the left-hand
headlamp.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Lights
78
7. HORIZONTAL AIM IS NOT REQUIRED FOR THIS VEHICLE AND IS
NON-ADJUSTABLE.
8. Close the hood and turn off the lamps.
TURN SIGNAL CONTROL
• Push down to activate the left
turn signal.
• Push up to activate the right turn
signal.
INTERIOR LAMPS
Dome lamps and map lamps
The front dome lamp is located overhead between the driver and
passenger seats.
The dome lamp control has three
positions:
• OFF: In this position, the lamp
will not illuminate.
• DOOR: In this position, the dome
lamp will illuminate only when a
door is opened and will remain
illuminated for 25 seconds after the door is shut.
• ON: In this position, the lamp will remain illuminated.
The map lamp controls (without
moon roof) are located on the dome
lamp. Press the button on either
side of each map lamp to illuminate
the lamps. Push the button again to
turn off the lamps.
OFF
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Lights
79
For models equipped with a moon
roof, the map lamps are located on
the moon roof control panel. Press
the button on either side of each
map lamp to illuminate the lamps.
Push the button again to turn off
the lamps.
The map lamps will illuminate
whenever a door is opened. After
the door is shut, the lamps will remain illuminated for 25 seconds.
Cargo and dome lamp
Rear cargo lamp equipped with an
ON/OFF/DOOR control will light
when:
• the doors are closed and the
control is in the ON position.
• the control is in the DOOR
position and any door is open.
When the control is in the OFF position, it will not illuminate when you
open the doors.
BULBS
Headlamp Condensation
The headlamps are vented to equalize pressure. When moist air enters
the headlamp(s) through the vents, there is a possibility that
condensation can occur. This condensation is normal and will clear
within 45 minutes of headlamp operation.
Replacing exterior bulbs
Check the operation of all the bulbs frequently.
Using the right bulbs
Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below. Headlamp bulbs must
be marked with an authorized “D.O.T.” for North America and an “E” for
Europe to assure lamp performance, light brightness and pattern and safe
visibility. The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly or void the
lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn time.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Lights
80
Function Number of bulbs Trade number
Park/turn lamps (front) 2 3157 AK (amber)
Headlamps (low beams) 2 H11
Headlamps (high beams) 2 H7
Rear stop/tail/sidemarker 2 3157K
Rear turn lamps 2 3156K
Backup lamp 2 3156K
Foglamp (front) 2 H10
Center High-mount stop
lamp
5
W5W
Rear license plate lamp 2 W5W
All replacement bulbs are clear in color except where noted.
To replace all instrument panel lights - see your dealer.
Replacing the interior bulbs
Check the operation of all bulbs frequently.
Replacing headlamp bulbs
1. Make sure that the headlamp control is in the OFF position and open
the hood.
2. Press down on the wire retainer
to release it and access the back of
the headlamp assembly.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Lights
81
Lowbeam bulb replacement
3. Locate the outboard most bulb,
turn it a
1
⁄
4
turn to the outside of
the vehicle and pull the bulb socket
straight out to remove the bulb.
Highbeam bulb replacement
4. Locate the bulb that is the most
center in the vehicle and remove
the electrical connector by pulling it
straight off.
5. Loosen the retainer clip by
squeezing the top of it while pulling
it away from the bulb socket.
6. Without turning, carefully pull
bulb out of headlamp assembly.
Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep out of
children’s reach. Grasp the bulb only by its metal base and do
not touch the glass. The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to
break the next time the headlamps are operated.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Lights
82
Note: The bulb’s metal base gets very hot during headlamp operation.
Be sure the bulb base is cool before handling.
Note: If the bulb is accidentally touched, it should be cleaned with
rubbing alcohol before being used.
To complete installation, follow the removal procedure in reverse order.
Replacing brake/tail/turn/backup lamp bulbs
The brake/tail/turn/backup lamp bulbs are located in the tail lamp
assembly, one just below the other. Follow the same steps to replace
either bulb:
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is
in the OFF position and then open
the liftgate to expose the lamp
assemblies.
2. Remove the two screws from the
lamp assembly.
3. Carefully remove the lamp
assembly by pulling it rearward to
disengage snap features on the
outward side of the lamp.
4. Twist the bulb socket
counterclockwise and remove from
lamp assembly.
5. Pull the bulb straight out of the
socket and push in the new bulb.
6. To complete installation, follow
the removal procedure in reverse
order.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Lights
83
Replacing license plate lamp bulbs
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is
in the OFF position and then pry
the license plate lamp assembly
(located above the license plate)
from the liftgate.
2. Remove bulb socket from lamp
assembly by turning
counterclockwise.
3. Pull the bulb out from the socket
and push in the new bulb.
4. Install the bulb socket in lamp assembly turning it clockwise.
5. To install, press the lamp assembly into liftgate.
Replacing high-mount brake lamp bulbs
To remove the lamp assembly:
1. Remove the two screws and move
the lamp assembly away from the
liftgate.
2. Remove the bulb holder from the
lamp assembly by depressing the
snaps.
3. Pull the bulb straight out of the
socket and push in the new bulb.
To complete installation, follow the
removal procedure in reverse order.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Lights
84
Replacing front parking lamp/turn signal bulbs
For bulb replacement, see a dealer or qualified technician.
Replacing foglamp bulbs
For bulb replacement, see a dealer or qualified technician.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Lights
85
MULTI-FUNCTION LEVER
Windshield wiper: For intermittent
operation, move control down one
position.
Adjust the rotary control to the
desired speed setting.
For normal or low speed wiper
operation, move control down two
positions from OFF.
For high speed wiper operation,
move control down three positions
from OFF.
Mist function: To activate mist,
push control up from the OFF
position and release to get one wipe.
Windshield washer: To activate
the windshield washer, pull control
toward you. Release control to stop
washer fluid spray.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
Driver Controls
86
Rear window wiper/washer controls
For intermittent operation of rear
wiper, rotate end of control upward
to the
position.
For normal speed rear wiper
operation, rotate control upward to
ON.
To activate the rear washer, rotate
the control to the
position and
release.
Changing the wiper blades
1. Pull the wiper blade and arm
away from the glass. Turn the blade
at a right angle to the arm. Push the
lock tab (A) to release the blade
from the arm loop and pull the
blade down toward the windshield
to remove it from the arm.
2. Attach the new blade to the arm
loop and pull it into place until a
click is heard.
3. Replace wiper blades every 6 months for optimum performance.
4. Poor wiper quality can sometimes be improved by cleaning the wiper
blades, refer to Window and wiper blades in the Cleaning chapter.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
87
5. To prolong the life of the wiper blades, it is highly recommended to
scrape off the ice on the windshield before turning on the wipers. The
layer of ice has many sharp edges and can damage the micro edge of the
wiper rubber element.
TILT STEERING WHEEL
To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Pull down the steering column tilt
lever.
2. Move the steering wheel up or
down until you find the desired
location.
3. Push the steering column tilt
lever up. This will lock the steering
wheel in position.
Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving.
AUXILIARY POWER POINT (12V)
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert
any other object in the power outlet for this will damage the
outlet and blow the fuse. Do not hang any type of accessory or
accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the power
outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty.
The auxiliary power point is located
in the floor console. Cigarette lighter
(if equipped) is located in the
instrument panel.
Do not use the power point for
operating the cigarette lighter
element (if equipped).
To prevent the fuse from being
blown, do not use the power
point(s) over the vehicle capacity of
12 VDC/180W.
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not use the power
point longer than necessary when the engine is not running.
Always keep the power point caps closed when not being used.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
88
Cigar lighter (if equipped)
Do not plug optional electrical accessories into the cigarette lighter
socket.
Do not hold the lighter in with your hand while it is heating, this will
damage the lighter element and socket. The lighter will be released from
its heating position when it is ready to be used.
Improper use of the lighter can cause damage not covered by your
warranty.
POWER POINT (110 VAC)
The 110 VAC power point outlet is used for powering electrical devices
that require up to 150W. Exceeding the 150W limit will cause the power
point to cut off the power temporarily to provide overload protection.
Note: The 110 VAC power point is
equipped with a safety cap and a
safety twist tab. They both provide
protection from inserting any object
into the power point other than the
110 VAC electrical device plug. The
safety cap should always be in a
closed position whenever the power
point outlet is not in use.
The 110 VAC power point is located
in the floor console in front of the
gearshift.
The power outlet is not designed for the following electric appliances;
they may not work properly:
• Cathode ray tube type televisions.
• Motor loads, such as vacuum cleaners, electric saws and other electric
power tools, compressor-driven refrigerators, etc.
• Measuring devices, which process precise data, such as medical
equipment, measuring equipment, etc.
• Other appliances requiring an extremely stable power supply:
microcomputer-controlled electric blankets, touch sensor lamps, etc.
Do not keep electrical devices plugged in the power point
whenever the device is not in use. It is not recommended to use
any extension cord with the 110 VAC power point, since it will
defeat the safety protection design provided by the cap and twist
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
89
tab. It will also cause the power point to overload due to
powering multiple devices that can reach beyond the 150W load
limit.
The power point can switch to a fault mode when it is overloaded,
overheated, or shorted. For overloading and shorting conditions, unplug
your device and turn the ignition key off then on. For overheating
condition, let the system cool off then turn the ignition key off then on.
The 110 VAC power point can provide power whenever the vehicle
ignition is in the run position and the power point green indicator light
located in the top left corner is turned on. Refer to the indicator light
code below for the power point status.
Indicator light Code
Green light is On — Power point is ready to supply power
Green light is Off — Power point power supply is off. Ignition is not in
Run position
Green light is blinking — Power point is in fault mode
POWER WINDOWS (IF EQUIPPED)
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not let
children play with the power windows. They may seriously injure
themselves.
When closing the power windows, you should verify they are free
of obstructions and ensure that children and/or pets are not in
the proximity of the window openings.
Press and hold the bottom part of
the rocker switch to open the
window. Press and hold the top part
of the rocker switch to close the
window.
Note: The window switches will not
illuminate when the window lock
control is in the LOCKED position.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
90
One touch down
Allows the driver’s window to open
fully without holding the control
down. Press completely down on
AUTO and release quickly. Press
again to stop.
Window lock (if equipped)
The window lock feature disables all
the power windows except the
driver’s.
To lock out all the window controls
except for the driver’s window press
the right side of the control.
Note: The window switches will not illuminate when the window control
is in the LOCKED position.
Press the left side to restore the window controls.
POWER SIDE VIEW MIRRORS
To adjust your mirrors:
1. Rotate the control, located on the
instrument panel left of the steering
wheel, clockwise to adjust the right
mirror and rotate the control
counterclockwise to adjust the left
mirror.
2. Move the control in the direction
you wish to tilt the mirror.
3. Return to the center position to lock mirrors in place.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
91
Fold-away mirrors
Pull the side mirrors in carefully
when driving through a narrow
space, like an automatic car wash.
SPEED CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
With speed control set, you can maintain a speed of 30 mph (48 km/h)
or more without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal. Speed
control does not work at speeds below 30 mph (48 km/h).
Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on roads that
are winding, slippery or unpaved.
Setting speed control
The controls for using your speed
control are located on the steering
wheel for your convenience.
1. Press the ON control and release
it.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed.
3. Press the SET ACC control and
release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
Note:
• Vehicle speed may vary momentarily when driving up and down a
steep hill.
• If the vehicle speed increases above the set speed on a downhill, you
may want to shift into “L” gear and/or apply the brakes to reduce the
speed.
RSM
SET
ACC
CST
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
92
• If the vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below
your set speed on an uphill, your speed control will disengage.
Resuming a set speed
Press the RSM control and release
it. This will automatically return the
vehicle to the previously set speed.
The RSM control will not work if the
vehicle speed is not faster than 30
mph (48 km/h).
Increasing speed while using speed control
There are two ways to set a higher
speed:
• Press and hold the SET ACC
control until you get to the
desired speed, then release the
control. You can also use the SET
ACC control to operate the
Tap-Up function. Press and
release this control to increase the vehicle set speed in small amounts
by 1 mph (2 km/h).
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the desired speed. When the
vehicle reaches that speed press and release the SET ACC control.
Reducing speed while using speed control
There are two ways to reduce a set
speed:
• Press and hold the CST control
until you get to the desired
speed, then release the control.
You can also use the CST control
to operate the Tap-Down
function. Press and release this
control to decrease the vehicle set speed in small amounts by 1 mph
(2 km/h).
RSM
SET
ACC
CST
RSM
SET
ACC
CST
RSM
SET
ACC
CST
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
93
• Depress the brake pedal until the
desired vehicle speed is reached,
press the SET ACC control.
Disengaging speed control
There are two ways to disengage the speed control:
• Depress the brake pedal. This will not erase your vehicle’s previously
set speed.
• Press the speed control CAN
control.
Note: When you cancel the speed
control, your speed control set
speed memory is retained.
Turning off speed control
There are two ways to turn off the speed control:
• Press the speed control OFF
control.
• Turn off the vehicle ignition.
Note: When you turn off the speed
control or the ignition, your speed
control set speed memory is erased.
MESSAGE CENTER
With the ignition in the RUN
position, the message center,
located on your instrument cluster,
displays important vehicle and daily
driving information through a
constant monitor of vehicle
systems. You may select display
features on the message center for a display of status preceded by a
RSM
SET
ACC
CST
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
94
brief indicator chime. The system will also notify you of potential vehicle
problems with a display of system warnings followed by an indicator
chime.
Selectable features
Set
This button is used to select and
reset various functions shown in the
INFO Menu.
Info menu
This control displays the following
control displays:
• Average Fuel Economy (if
equipped)
• Distance to Empty
• Instantaneous Fuel Economy (if
equipped)
• Battery SOC/Energy Available
• Units (English/Metric)
• Language
• System Check
• INFO Display on/off
Average fuel economy (AFE) (if equipped)
This function will display your
average fuel economy in miles/gallon
or liters/100 km.
If you calculate your average fuel
economy by dividing gallons of fuel
used by 100 miles traveled
(kilometers traveled by liters used), your figure may be different than
displayed for the following reasons:
• your vehicle was not perfectly level during fill-up
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
95
• differences in the automatic shut-off points on the fuel pumps at
service stations
• variations in top-off procedure from one fill-up to another
• rounding of the displayed values to the nearest 0.1 gallon (liter)
1. Drive the vehicle at least 5 miles (8 km) with the speed control
system engaged to display a stabilized average.
2. Record the highway fuel economy for future reference.
It is important to press the SET control after setting the speed control to
get accurate highway fuel economy readings.
To reset back to zero, press and hold the SET button for 2 seconds.
Distance to empty (DTE)
Selecting this function from the
INFO menu will give you an
estimate of how far you can drive
with the fuel remaining in your tank
under normal driving conditions.
Remember to turn the ignition
LOCK when refueling your vehicle. Otherwise, the display will not show
the addition of fuel for a few kilometers (miles).
Instantaneous fuel economy (if equipped)
Press INFO until the menu displays
“INSTANT ECON”. This will display
your fuel economy as a Bar Graph
ranging from “L” poor economy to
“H” excellent economy.
Your vehicle must be moving to
calculate instantaneous fuel economy. When your vehicle is not moving,
this function shows “L”, one or no bars illuminated. Instantaneous fuel
economy cannot be reset.
Battery Energy or State of Charge (SOC) Available
Select this function from the INFO
menu for the state of charge of the
high voltage battery. For a low
battery “ELEC ENERGY AVAIL
LOW” will be displayed and for
normal operation “ELEC ENERGY
AVAIL NORMAL” will be displayed.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
96
Units (English/Metric)
1. Select this function from the
INFO menu for the current units to
be displayed.
2. Press the SET control to change
the message display from English to
Metric.
System check
Selecting this function from the
INFO menu causes the message
center to cycle through each of the
systems being monitored. For each
of the monitored systems, the
message center will indicate either
an OK message or a warning
message for three seconds.
Pressing the SET control cycles the message center through each of the
systems being monitored.
The sequence of the system check report is as follows:
1. Oil Change Reminder (if equipped)
2. HEV Hazard
3. HEV Caution
4. Charging System
5. Brake Fluid Level
6. Liftgate Status
7. Exterior Lamps
8. Power Steering
9. 4 Wheel Drive (if equipped)
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
97
Language
1. Select this function from the
INFO menu for the current language
to be displayed.
2. Pressing the SET control cycles
the message center through each of
the language choices.
3. Press and hold the SET control
for 2 seconds to set the language
choice.
Display On/Off
Select this function from the INFO control to turn your message center
display OFF or ON.
System warnings/information
System warnings alert you to possible problems or malfunctions in your
vehicle’s operating systems.
In the event of a multiple warning situation, the message center will
cycle the display to show all warnings by displaying each one for four
seconds.
The message center will display the last selected feature if there are no
more warning messages. This allows you to use the full functionality of
the message center after you acknowledge the warning by pressing the
SET control and clearing the warning message.
Warning messages that have been reset are divided into two categories:
• They will reappear on the display ten minutes from the reset.
• They will not reappear until an ignition LOCK-RUN cycle has been
completed.
This acts as a reminder that these warning conditions still exist within
the vehicle.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
98
Warnings Status
Stop safely now Warning cannot be reset
High engine temperature
High electric motor temperature
Driver door ajar
Passenger door ajar
Rear left door ajar
Rear right door ajar
Service soon Warning returns after 10 minutes
Park brake on
Liftgate ajar Warning returns after the ignition
key is turned from LOCK to RUN.
Liftgate glass ajar
Service emission sys
Check fuel cap
Low brake fluid
Service brake system
Service regen system
Performance reduced
Check brake lamps
Check left headlamp
Check right headlamp
Check left high beam
Check right high beam
Check left turn lamps
Check right turn lamps
Check park lamps
Engine oil change soon (if equipped)
Engine oil change now reminder (if
equipped)
Low fuel
Service pwr steering
Service4X4
Turn signal on
Speed control on
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
99
Warnings Status
4X4 locked temporarily Temporary alert
4X4 disabled temporarily
4X4 auto restored
Jump start complete
JS abort see manual
STOP SAFELY NOW. Displayed when the Master electrical hazard
warning lamp is illuminated indicating a Hybrid component failure. If this
warning occurs, the vehicle will soon shutdown without further warning,
stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible and contact your dealer as
soon as possible.
HIGH ENGINE TEMPERATURE. Displayed when the engine coolant
is overheating. Engine coolant temperature warning lamp will illuminate
indicating coolant temperature is high. Stop the vehicle as soon as safely
possible, turn off the engine and let it cool. Check the coolant and
coolant level. Refer to Engine coolant in the Maintenance and
Specifications chapter. If the warning stays on or continues to come on,
contact your Ford Dealer as soon as possible.
HIGH ELECTRIC MOTOR TEMPERATURE. Displayed when the
motor electronics are overheating. Stop the vehicle as soon as safely
possible, turn off the engine and let it cool. Refer to Engine coolant and
motor/electronics coolant in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact your
Ford Dealer as soon as possible.
PERFORMANCE REDUCED. Displayed when the vehicle performance
is reduced due to failsafe cooling.
DRIVER DOOR AJAR. Displayed when the driver door is not
completely closed.
PASSENGER DOOR AJAR. Displayed when the passenger door is not
completely closed.
REAR LEFT DOOR AJAR. Displayed when the rear left door is not
completely closed.
REAR RIGHT DOOR AJAR. Displayed when the rear right door is not
completely closed.
LIFTGATE AJAR. Displayed when the liftgate is not completely closed.
Press SET to reset display.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
100
LIFTGATE GLASS AJAR. Displayed when the liftgate glass is not
completely closed.
SERVICE SOON. Displayed when service lamp (yellow wrench ) is
activated. If the warning or indicator light stays on or continue to come
on, contact your dealer as soon as possible.
PARK BRAKE ON. Displayed when the park brake is ON. If the
warning and indicator light stays on after the park brake is off, contact
your dealer as soon as possible.
SERVICE EMISSION SYS. Displayed when the engine has defaulted to
a ’limp-home’ operation. If the warning stays on or continues to come on,
contact your dealer as soon as possible.
CHECK FUEL CAP. Displayed when the fuel filler cap is not properly
installed. Check the fuel filler cap for proper installation. Refer to Fuel
filler cap in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM. Displayed when the braking system is not
operating properly. If the warning stays on or continues to come on,
contact your dealer as soon as possible.
SERVICE REGEN SYSTEM. Indicates the regen system is disabled at
this moment. Please see your dealer if this warning remains present over
several days.
SERVICE PWR STEERING. Displayed when the power steering system
is not operating properly. If this warning and the
service soon
indicator light stays on or continues to come on, contact your dealer for
service as soon as possible.
CHECK BRAKE LAMPS. Displayed when the brake lamps are
activated and at least one is burned out. Check the lamps as soon as
possible and have the burned out lamp replaced. The center high-mount
brakelamp is not monitored.
CHECK LEFT OR RIGHT HEADLAMPS. Displayed when the
headlamps are activated and at least one is burned out. Check the lamps
as soon as possible and have the burned out lamp replaced. Refer to
Replacing headlamp bulbs in the Lights chapter.
CHECK LEFT OR RIGHT HIGH BEAMS. Displayed when the
headlamps are activated and at least one is burned out. Check the lamps
as soon as possible and have the burned out lamp replaced. Refer to
Replacing headlamp bulbs in the Lights chapter.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
101
CHECK LEFT OR RIGHT TURN LAMPS. Displayed when the turn
signals are activated and at least one is burned out. Check the lamps as
soon as safely possible and have the burned out lamp replaced.
CHECK PARK LAMPS. Displayed when the park lamps are activated
and at least one is burned out. Check the lamps as soon as possible and
have the burned out lamp replaced.
LOW FUEL. Displayed as an early reminder of a low fuel condition. The
function will display “LOW FUEL LEVEL” and sound a tone for one
second when you have low fuel level indicated on the fuel gauge.
SERVICE 4X4. Displayed when the 4X4 is not operating properly. If the
warning stays on or continues to come on, contact your dealer as soon as
possible.
TURN SIGNAL ON. Displayed when the turn signal is activated and the
vehicle is driven more than 1/2 mile (0.8 km).
SPEED CONTROL ON. Displayed when the speed control is activated.
4X4 LOCKED TEMPORARILY. Displayed when the 4X4 is temporarily
locked.
4X4 DISABLED TEMPORARILY. Displayed when the 4X4 is
temporarily disabled.
4X4 AUTO RESTORED. Displayed when the 4X4 is restored to normal
operations.
JUMP START COMPLETE. Displayed when attempting to jump the
high voltage battery, refer to Jump starting the high voltage battery in
the Roadside Emergencies chapter
JS ABORT SEE MANUAL. Displayed when the low voltage
(underhood) battery does not have enough energy to charge the high
voltage battery. Refer to Jump starting your vehicle (Low voltage
[underhood] battery only) in the Roadside Emergencies chapter
ENGINE OIL CHANGE SOON/ENGINE OIL CHANGE NOW
REMINDER (if equipped). Displayed when the engine oil life
remaining is 5% or less. When oil life left is between 5% and 0%, the
ENGINE OIL CHANGE SOON message will be displayed. When oil life
left reaches 0%, the ENGINE OIL CHANGE NOW message will be
displayed.
An oil change is required whenever indicated by the message center.
USE ONLY RECOMMENDED ENGINE OILS.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
102
To reset the oil monitoring system to 100% after each oil change
(approximately 10,000 miles [16,000 km] or 12 months) perform the
following:
1. Press the SET control to access
the system check function.
2. Press and release the SET control
to display “OIL CHNG XXX% HOLD
SET NEW”.
3. Press and hold the SET control
for 2 seconds to display “OIL
CHANGE SET TO 100%”.
Note: This feature is based on
distance traveled or time elapsed
since last reset. You must reset this
feature every oil change to ensure accuracy
DATA ERR. These messages indicate improper operation of the vehicle
network communication between electronic modules.
• Fuel computer
• Oil life
• Charging system
• Door sensor
• Washer fluid
• Brake fluid
• Engine sensor
Contact your Ford dealer as soon as possible if these messages occur on
a regular basis.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
103
CENTER CONSOLE
Your vehicle is equipped with a variety of console features. These
include:
1. Power point
2. Cupholders
3. Utility compartment
4. Ash cup (if equipped)
Use only soft cups in the
cupholder. Hard objects can
injure you in a collision.
Cell phone use
The use of Mobile Communications Equipment has become increasingly
important in the conduct of business and personal affairs. However,
drivers must not compromise their own or others’ safety when using
such equipment. Mobile Communications can enhance personal safety
and security when appropriately used, particularly in emergency
situations. Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications
equipment to avoid negating these benefits.
Mobile Communication Equipment includes, but is not limited to cellular
phones, pagers, portable email devices, in vehicle communications
systems, telematics devices and portable two-way radios.
A driver’s first responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle.
The most important thing you can do to prevent a crash is to
avoid distractions and pay attention to the road. Wait until it is safe to
operate Mobile Communications Equipment.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
104
LIFTGATE
To open the rear window, pull the
right side of the liftgate handle.
To open the liftgate, pull the left
side of the liftgate handle.
• Do not open the liftgate or
liftgate glass in a garage or other
enclosed area with a low ceiling.
If the liftgate glass is raised and
the liftgate is also opened, both
liftgate and glass could be
damaged against a low ceiling.
• Do not leave the liftgate or liftgate glass open while driving. Doing so
could cause serious damage to the liftgate and its components as well
as allowing carbon monoxide to enter the vehicle.
Make sure that the liftgate door and/or window are closed to
prevent exhaust fumes from being drawn into the vehicle.
Exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide which can injure your lungs
and cause drowsiness and even death. This will also prevent
passengers and cargo from falling out. If you must drive with the
liftgate door or window open, keep the vents open so outside air comes
into the vehicle.
CARGO SHADE (IF EQUIPPED)
If your vehicle has a cargo shade, you can use it to cover items in the
cargo area of your vehicle.
To install the shade:
• Insert the ends of the cargo
shade into the mounting features
located behind the rear seat on
the rear trim panels.
To operate the shade:
1. Grasp the handle at the rear edge
of the shade and pull rearward.
2. Secure both ends of the support
rod into the retention slots located
on the rear quarter trim panels.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
105
Ensure that the posts are properly latched in mounting features.
The cover may cause injury in a sudden stop or accident if it is
not securely installed.
Do not place any objects on the cargo area shade. They may
obstruct your vision or strike occupants of vehicle in the case of
a sudden stop or collision.
LUGGAGE RACK
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
roof rack. The maximum load for
the roof rack is 100 lbs (44 kg),
evenly distributed on the crossbars.
If it is not possible to evenly
distribute the load, position it in the
center or as far forward on the
crossbars as possible. Always use
the adjustable tie down loops to
secure the load.
Do not use the vehicle’s door handles as tie down loops.
To adjust the cross-bar position:
1. Loosen the thumbwheel at both
ends of the cross-bar (both
cross-bars are adjustable).
2. Slide the cross-bar to the desired
location.
3. Tighten the thumbwheel at both
ends of the cross-bar.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
106
To remove the cross-bar assembly from the roof rack side rails:
1. Loosen the thumbwheel at both
ends of the cross-bar (both
cross-bars are adjustable).
2. Slide the cross-bar to the end of
the rail.
3. Use a long, flat object to depress
the tongue in the endcaps on both
sides of the cross-bar.
4. Slide the cross-bar assembly off
the end of the rail.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
107
To reinstall the cross-bar assembly to the roof rack side rails:
1. Ensure that both cross-bar
assemblies are installed with the F
(front) arrow facing towards the
front of the vehicle.
2. Use a long, flat object to depress
the tongue in the endcaps on both
sides of the cross-bar.
3. Slide the cross-bar assemblies
over the end cap tongue and into
the side rails.
4. Tighten thumbwheel at both ends
of the cross-bar.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
108
KEYS
The key operates all locks on your vehicle. You should always carry a
second key with you in a safe place in case you require it in an
emergency.
Your keys are programmed to your vehicle; using a non-programmed key
will not permit your vehicle to start. If you lose your dealer supplied
keys, replacement keys are available through your authorized dealer.
POWER DOOR LOCKS
The power door lock controls are
located on the driver and front
passenger door panels.
Pressing the
will unlock all the
doors. Pressing the
will lock all
the doors.
Power door lock/unlock inhibit feature
As a theft deterrent, the power door lock controls can be disabled 20
seconds after the ignition has been turned to the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position
and the vehicle is locked using the remote entry transmitter or the key
in the door lock cylinder. The door lock controls are reenabled when the
vehicle is unlocked using the key in the door lock cylinder or by
pressing
on the remote entry transmitter. This feature can be turned
on or off using the following procedure:
Before starting, ensure the ignition is in the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position and
all vehicle doors are closed. You must complete Steps 1–5 within 30
seconds or the procedure will have to be repeated.
1. Place the key in the ignition and turn the ignition to the 3 (RUN)
position.
2. Press the power door unlock control on the door panel three times.
3. Turn the ignition from the 3 (RUN) position to the 1 (OFF/LOCK)
position.
4. Press the power door unlock control on the door panel three times.
5. Turn the ignition back to the 3 (RUN) position. The horn will chirp
one time to confirm programming mode has been entered and is active.
6. Press the power door lock control on the door panel two times within
five seconds. The horn will chirp two times to confirm the feature is off;
the horn will chirp two times and honk one time to confirm the feature is
on.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Locks and Security
Locks and Security
109
7. Turn the ignition from the 3 (RUN) position to the 1 (OFF/LOCK)
position. The horn will chirp one time to confirm the programming mode
has been exited.
Repeat the procedure to turn the feature on or off.
Door key unlocking/locking
Two step door unlocking
1. Turn the key in the door cylinder to unlock the driver’s door. Note:
The interior lamps will illuminate if the control on the overhead lamp is
in the DOOR position. For more information, refer to Illuminated entry
later in this chapter.
2. Turn the key in the door cylinder again within three seconds to unlock
the passenger doors, the liftgate and liftgate glass.
One step door unlocking
If the one step door unlocking feature is activated, turn the key in the
door cylinder once to unlock all of the doors, the liftgate and liftgate
glass. Note: The interior lamps will illuminate (refer to the Illuminated
entry feature later in this section), if the control on the overhead lamp is
in the DOOR position. For information on switching from two step to one
step door unlocking, refer to Switching from two step to one step door
unlocking later in this chapter.
Locking the doors
Turn the key in the door cylinder to lock all the doors. The park/turn
lamps will flash once.
If any of the doors, the liftgate or the hood are not properly closed the
park/turn lamps will not flash.
Smart unlocking feature
The smart unlocking feature helps prevent you from locking yourself out
of the vehicle. With the key in any ignition position, the driver’s door will
automatically unlock if it is locked using the power lock control on the
driver’s door panel while the driver’s door is open.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Locks and Security
110
Childproof door locks
• When these locks are set, the
rear doors cannot be opened from
the inside.
• The rear doors can be opened
from the outside when the doors
are unlocked.
The childproof locks are located on
rear edge of each rear door and
must be set separately for each
door. Setting the lock for one door
will not automatically set the lock
for both doors.
• Rotate lock control in the
direction of arrow to engage the
lock.
• Rotate control in the opposite
direction to disengage childproof
locks.
REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device
must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
The typical operating range for your remote entry transmitter is
approximately 33 feet (10 meters). A decrease in operating range could
be caused by:
• weather conditions,
• nearby radio towers,
• structures around the vehicle, or
• other vehicles parked next to your vehicle.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Locks and Security
111
The remote entry system allows you
to lock or unlock all vehicle doors
without a key. The remote locking
and unlocking features will operate
independent of the ignition position;
however, the panic feature will only
operate when the ignition is in the 1
(LOCK) or 2 (ACCESSORY)
position.
If there are problems with the
remote entry system, make sure to
take ALL remote entry transmitters with you to the dealership in
order to aid in troubleshooting the problem.
Two step door unlocking
1. Press and release to unlock the driver’s door. Note: The interior
lamps will illuminate if the control on the overhead lamp is in the DOOR
position.
2. Press
and release again within three seconds to unlock the
passenger doors, the liftgate and liftgate glass.
One step door unlocking
If the one step door unlocking feature is activated, press
and release
once to unlock all of the doors, the liftgate and liftgate glass. Note: The
interior lamps will illuminate (refer to Illuminated entry information
later in this section), if the control on the overhead lamp is in the DOOR
position.
Switching from two step to one step door unlocking
Unlocking can be switched between two step and one step door
unlocking by pressing and holding both
and buttons
simultaneously on the remote entry transmitter for approximately 4
seconds. The parklamps will flash twice to indicate that the vehicle has
switched to one step unlocking. Repeat the procedure to switch back to
two step unlocking.
Locking the doors
1. Press and release to lock all the doors. Assuming all vehicle doors
and the liftgate are properly closed, the park/turn lamps will flash once.
2. Press
and release again within three seconds to confirm that all the
doors and liftgate are closed and locked. Note: The doors will lock again
and the horn will chirp once.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Locks and Security
112
If any of the doors or the hood are not properly closed, the horn will
chirp twice and park/turn lamps will not flash when the
control is
pressed.
Sounding a panic alarm
Press
to activate the alarm. To deactivate the feature, press the
control again, turn the ignition to the 3 (RUN) or 4 (START) position, or
wait for the alarm to time out in approximately 3 minutes.
Note: The panic alarm will only operate when the ignition is in the 1
(LOCK) or 2 (ACCESSORY) position.
Replacing the battery
The remote entry transmitter uses one coin type three-volt lithium
battery CR2032 or equivalent.
To replace the battery:
1. Twist a thin coin between the two
halves of the remote entry
transmitter near the key ring. DO
NOT TAKE THE RUBBER COVER
AND CIRCUIT BOARD OFF THE
FRONT HOUSING OF THE
REMOTE ENTRY TRANSMITTER.
2. Do not wipe off any grease on the
battery terminals on the back
surface of the circuit board.
3. Remove the old battery. Note: Please refer to local regulations when
disposing of transmitter batteries.
4. Insert the new battery. Refer to the diagram inside the remote entry
transmitter for the correct orientation of the battery. Press the battery
down to ensure that the battery is fully seated in the battery housing
cavity.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Locks and Security
113
5. Snap the two halves back together.
Note: Replacement of the battery will not cause the remote transmitter
to become deprogrammed from your vehicle. The remote transmitter
should operate normally after battery replacement.
Replacing lost remote entry transmitters
If you would like to have your remote entry transmitter reprogrammed
because you lost one, or would like to buy additional remote entry
transmitters, you can either reprogram them yourself, or take all
remote entry transmitters to your authorized dealer for
reprogramming.
How to reprogram your remote entry transmitters
You must have all remote entry transmitters (maximum of four)
available before beginning this procedure. If all remote entry transmitters
are not present during the programming procedure, the transmitters that
are not present during programming will no longer operate the vehicle.
To reprogram the remote entry
transmitters:
1. Ensure the vehicle is electronically unlocked.
2. Put the key in the ignition.
3. Turn the key from the 1 (LOCK) position to 3 (RUN).
4. Cycle eight times rapidly (within 10 seconds) between the 1 (LOCK)
position and 3 (RUN). Note: The eighth turn must end in the 3 (RUN)
position.
5. The doors will lock, then unlock, to confirm that the programming
mode has been activated.
6. Within 20 seconds press any button on the remote entry transmitter.
Note: If more than 20 seconds have passed you will need to start the
procedure over again.
7. The doors will lock, then unlock, to confirm that this remote entry
transmitter has been programmed.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Locks and Security
114
8. Repeat Step 6 to program each additional remote entry transmitter.
9. Turn the ignition to the 1 (LOCK) position after you have finished
programming all of the remote entry transmitters.
10. The doors will lock, then unlock, to confirm that the programming
mode has been exited.
Illuminated entry
The interior lamps illuminate when the remote entry system is used to
unlock the door(s).
The illuminated entry system will turn off the interior lights if:
• the ignition switch is turned to the 2 (ACCESSORY) position, or
• the remote transmitter lock control is pressed, or
• the doors are locked by key in the door cylinder, or
• after 25 seconds of illumination.
Illuminated exit
• The interior lights will illuminate when the key is removed from the
ignition.
The lamps automatically turn off after 25 seconds. The dome and cargo
lamp controls must not be set to the OFF position for the illuminated
exit system to operate.
PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The perimeter anti-theft system will warn you in the event of an
unauthorized entry to your vehicle.
If there is any potential perimeter anti-theft problem with your vehicle,
ensure ALL remote entry transmitters are taken to the dealership to
aid in troubleshooting.
Arming the system
When armed, this system will respond if unauthorized entry is
attempted. When unauthorized entry occurs, the system will flash the
park/turn lamps and will sound the horn.
The system is ready to arm whenever the key is removed from the
ignition. Any of the following actions will prearm the alarm system:
• Press the
control on the remote entry transmitter.
• Lock the doors with the key in the key cylinder.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Locks and Security
115
• Open the driver’s door and press the power door lock control to lock
all the doors, and then close the door.
Note: The doors, liftgate and hood will arm individually, and if any of
them are open, they must be closed in order to be armed.
When you lock the vehicle using any of the methods above:
• the park/turn lamps will flash once to indicate the hood, each door
and the liftgate are closed.
• the park/turn lamps will not flash if the hood, any door or the liftgate
are open. Once all doors, hood and liftgate are closed, the park/turn
lamps will flash to confirm the alarm will be set.
When the vehicle is locked, the alarm is set after a 20–second arming
period.
When you press the
control on the remote entry transmitter twice
within three seconds, the horn will chirp once to confirm the doors,
liftgate and hood are closed and locked, and the alarm is set.
Disarming the system
You can disarm the system by any of the following actions:
• Unlock the doors by pressing the
control on your remote entry
transmitter.
• Unlock the doors with a key. Turn the key full travel (toward the front
of the vehicle) to ensure the alarm disarms.
• Turning the key in the ignition to the 3 (RUN) or 4 (START) position.
Triggering the anti-theft system
The armed system will be triggered if any door, liftgate or the hood is
opened without using the key or the remote entry transmitter.
To deactivate the triggered alarm state:
• Unlock the doors by pressing the
control on your remote entry
transmitter.
• Unlock the doors with a key. Turn the key full travel (toward the front
of the vehicle) to ensure the alarm disarms.
• Press
on the remote entry transmitter to disable the alarm; the
alarm will be disabled, but the vehicle will remain in an armed state.
• Turning the key in the ignition to the 3 (RUN) or 4 (START) position.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Locks and Security
116
FRONT SEATS
Notes:
Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the
seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe personal injuries in the
event of a collision.
Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to reduce the risk of
injury in a collision or sudden stop.
Adjustable head restraints
The purpose of these head restraints is to help limit head motion in the
event of a rear collision. To properly adjust your head restraints, lift the
head restraint so that it is located directly behind your head or as close
to that position as possible.
The head restraints can be moved
up and down.
Push side control and push down on
head restraint to lower it.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Seating and Safety Restraints
117
Adjusting the front manual seat
Lift handle to move seat forward or
backward.
Pull lever up to adjust seatback.
Adjusting the front power seat (if equipped)
The control is located on the outboard side of the seat cushion.
Press to raise or lower the front
portion of the seat cushion.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
118
Press to raise or lower the rear
portion of the seat cushion.
Press the control to move the seat
forward, backward, up or down.
Heated seats (if equipped)
To operate the heated seats:
• Push the control located on the
seat to activate.
• Push again to deactivate.
The heated seats will activate when the ignition is in the RUN position.
When activated, they will turn off automatically after 10 minutes or when
the ignition is turned to the OFF position.
Rear seats
Head restraints
The purpose of these head restraints is to help limit head motion in the
event of a rear collision. To properly adjust your head restraints, lift the
head restraint so that it is located directly behind your head or as close
to that position as possible.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
119
The head restraints can be moved
up and down. Lift the head restraint
so that it is located directly or as
close as possible behind your head.
Push control to lower or remove
head restraint.
Folding down rear seats
1. Raise the rear seat head restraint
and remove.
2. Place the head restraint under
the front seat for storage.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
120
3. Pull the seat release control.
Note: Make sure the floor is clear of all objects before folding the seat.
4. Flip seat forward.
Attach the seatbelt web snap button
to the quarter trim panel snap
button. This will assure that seatbelt
does not get caught by staying out
of the seat back folding path.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
121
5. To release seatback, pull the
seatback release lever (on top of
seat) toward the front seat. This is
common for both 60% and 40%
seatbacks.
Note: When the seatback release
lever is pulled, slowly lower
seatback to the flat position.
6. Rotate seatback down into load
floor position.
Returning the rear seats to upright position
1. Pull seatback up and into upright
position making sure seatback locks
into place and the red seat
unlatched indicator on release
paddle is not visible.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
122
2. Rotate seat cushion down into the
seating position making sure that
the seat cushion is locked into place
and that the seat belt buckles are
exposed.
Make sure seat belt buckle
heads are through elastic
holders on seat backs. Seat belt
buckles may break if they are
trapped underneath the seatback
as the seatback is rotated down.
Before returning the seatback to its original position, make sure
that cargo or any objects are not trapped underneath the
seatback. After returning the seatback to its original position, pull on
the seatback to ensure that it has fully latched. An unlatched seat may
become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or collision.
3. Remove the head restraint stored
under the front seat and return it to
the original position on the seat
back.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
123
To remove the rear cushion
1. Lift the yellow tab to release the
hinges.
2. Pull the cushion to the outboard
side of the vehicle.
To install the rear cushion
1. Push the cushion to the inboard
side of the vehicle.
2. Make sure that the hinges are
locked into place.
SAFETY RESTRAINTS
Safety System
The Safety System provides an improved overall level of frontal crash
protection to front seat occupants and is designed to help further reduce
the risk of air bag-related injuries. The system is able to analyze different
occupant conditions and crash severity before activating the appropriate
safety devices to help better protect a range of occupants in a variety of
frontal crash situations.
Your vehicle’s Safety System consists of:
• Driver dual-stage air bag and Single stage passenger air bag
supplemental restraints
• Front safety belts with pretensioners, energy management retractors,
and safety belt usage sensors
• Front passenger sensing system
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
124
• Front crash severity sensor.
• Restraints Control Module (RCM) with impact and safing sensors.
• Restraint system warning light and back-up tone.
• The electrical wiring for the air bags, crash sensor(s), safety belt
pretensioners, front safety belt usage sensors, driver seat position
sensor, passenger occupant classification sensor, and indicator lights.
How does the Safety System work?
The Safety System can adapt the deployment strategy of your vehicle’s
safety devices according to crash severity and occupant conditions. A
collection of crash and occupant sensors provides information to the
Restraints control module (RCM). During a crash, the RCM activates the
safety belt pretensioners, equipped with a pyrotechnic dual retractor
(drivers side only) and/or either the single stage passenger air bag or
both stages of the dual-stage driver air bag supplemental restraints based
on crash severity and occupant conditions.
The fact that the pyrotechnic dual retractor (drivers side only),
pretensioners or air bags did not activate for both front seat occupants in a
collision does not mean that something is wrong with the system. Rather, it
means the Safety System determined the accident conditions (crash
severity, belt usage, etc.) were not appropriate to activate these safety
devices. Front air bags, pretensioners, equipped with a pyrotechnic dual
retractor (drivers side only) are designed to activate only in frontal and
near-frontal collisions, not rollovers, side-impacts, or rear-impacts unless
the collision causes sufficient longitudinal deceleration.
Driver dual-stage air bag supplemental restraints (driver seating
position only)
The dual-stage air bag offers the capability to tailor the level of air bag
inflation energy. A lower, less forceful energy level is provided for more
common, moderate-severity impacts. A higher energy level is used for
the most severe impacts. Refer to Air bag supplemental restraints
section in this chapter.
Front crash severity sensor
The front crash severity sensor enhances the ability to detect the
severity of an impact. Positioned up front, it provides valuable
information early in the crash event on the severity of the impact. This
allows your Safety System to distinguish between different levels of crash
severity and modify the deployment strategy of the driver dual-stage air
bag and safety belt pretensioners equipped with pyrotechnic dual
retractor (drivers side only).
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
125
Driver’s seat position sensor
The driver’s seat position sensor allows your Safety System to tailor the
deployment level of the driver air bag based on seat position. The system
is designed to help protect smaller drivers sitting close to the driver air
bag by providing a lower air bag output level.
Front passenger sensing system
For air bags to do their job they must inflate with great force, and this
force can pose a potentially deadly risk to occupants that are very close
to the air bag when it begins to inflate. For some occupants, like infants
in rear-facing child seats, this occurs because they are initially sitting
very close to the air bag. For other occupants, this occurs when the
occupant is not properly restrained by seat belts or child safety seats and
they move forward during pre-crash braking. The most effective way to
reduce the risk of unnecessary injuries is to make sure all occupants are
properly restrained. Accident statistics suggest that children are much
safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the
front.
Air bags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. NEVER place a
rear-facing child seat in front of an active air bag. If you must
use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the seat all the
way back.
Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back
seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints.
The front passenger sensing system can automatically turn off the
passenger front air bag. The system is designed to help protect small
(child size) occupants from air bag deployments when they are
improperly seated or restrained in the front passenger seat contrary to
proper child-seating or restraint usage recommendations. Even with this
technology, parents are STRONGLY encouraged to always properly
restrain children in the rear seat. The sensor also turns off the air bag
when the passenger seat is empty to prevent unnecessary replacement of
the air bag(s) after a collision.
When the front passenger seat is occupied and the sensing system has
turned off the passenger’s frontal air bag, the “pass air bag off” indicator
will light and stay lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal air
bag is off. See Front passenger sensing system in the airbags section of
this chapter.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
126
Front safety belt usage sensors
The front safety belt usage sensors detect whether or not the driver and
front outboard passenger safety belts are fastened. This information
allows your Safety System to tailor the air bag deployment and safety
belt pretensioner activation depending upon safety belt usage. Refer to
Safety belt section in this chapter.
Front safety belt pretensioners
The safety belt system equipped with pyrotechnic dual retractor (drivers
side only), pretensioners at the front outboard seating positions are
designed to tighten the safety belts firmly against the occupant’s body
during a frontal or near-frontal collision. This maximizes the effectiveness
of the safety belts and helps properly position the occupant relative to
the air bag to improve protection. The safety belt, equipped with
pyrotechnic dual retractor (drivers side only) and pretensioners can be
either activated alone or, if the collision is of sufficient severity, together
with the air bags.
Front safety belt energy management retractors equipped with
pyrotechnic dual retractor (drivers side only)
The front outboard safety belt, energy management retractors equipped
with pyrotechnic dual retractor (drivers side only), once initiated allows
webbing to be pulled out of the retractor in a gradual and controlled
manner in response to the occupant’s forward momentum. This helps
reduce the risk of force-related injuries to the occupant’s chest by
limiting the load on the occupant. Refer to Energy management feature
section in this chapter.
Determining if the Safety System is operational
The Safety System uses a warning light in the instrument cluster or a
back-up tone to indicate the condition of the system. Refer to the
Warning light section in the Instrument Cluster chapter. Routine
maintenance of the Personal Safety System is not required.
The Restraints control module (RCM) monitors its own internal circuits
and the circuits for the air bag supplemental restraints, crash sensor(s),
safety belt pretensioners, front safety belt buckle sensors, driver seat
position sensor, and passenger occupant classification sensor. In addition,
the RCM also monitors the restraints warning light in the instrument
cluster. A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the
following.
• The warning light will either flash or stay lit.
• The warning light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is
turned on.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
127
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and warning light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the Safety
System serviced at your dealership or by a qualified technician
immediately. Unless serviced, the system may not function properly in
the event of a collision.
Safety restraints precautions
Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap
belt snug and low across the hips.
To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit where they
can be properly restrained.
Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the
vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from
injury in a collision.
All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always
properly wear their safety belts, even when an air bag
supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to
ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a
safety belt properly.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely
to die than a person wearing a safety belt.
Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific safety belt
assembly which is made up of one buckle and one tongue that
are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt on the
outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm. 2)
Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside shoulder.
3) Never use a single belt for more than one person.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
128
Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back
seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints.
Safety belts and seats can become hot in a vehicle that has been
closed up in sunny weather; they could burn a small child. Check
seat covers and buckles before you place a child anywhere near them.
Energy Management Feature
• This vehicle has a safety belt system with an energy management
feature at the front outboard seating positions to help further reduce
the risk of injury in the event of a head-on collision.
• The front outboard safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is
designed to extend the seat belt webbing in a controlled manner. This
helps reduce the belt force acting on the user’s chest.
Combination lap and shoulder belts
1. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) until you hear a snap and feel
it latch. Make sure the tongue is
securely fastened in the buckle.
2. To unfasten, push the release
button and remove the tongue from
the buckle.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
129
All safety belts in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder belts.
The passenger safety belts have two types of locking modes described
below:
Vehicle sensitive mode
This is the normal retractor mode, which allows free shoulder belt length
adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle
movement. For example, if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner
sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of approximately 5 mph (8
km/h) or more, the combination safety belts will lock to help reduce
forward movement of the driver and passengers.
Automatic locking mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The belt will
still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The automatic
locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt.
This mode should be used any time a child safety seat (other than a
belt-positioning booster) is installed. Children 12 years old and under
should be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever possible. Refer
to Safety restraints for children or Safety seats for children later in
this chapter.
How to use the automatic locking mode
• Buckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
130
• Grasp the shoulder portion and
pull downward until the entire
belt is pulled out.
• Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking
sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking
mode.
How to disengage the automatic locking mode
Disconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract
completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
After any vehicle collision, the safety belt systems at all seating
positions (except the driver position, which doesn’t have this
feature) must be checked by a qualified technician to verify that the
automatic locking retractor feature for child seats is still functioning
properly. In addition, all seat belts should be checked for proper
function.
BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST BE REPLACED if
the seat belt assembly “automatic locking retractor” feature or
any other seat belt function is not operating properly when checked
according to the procedures in Workshop Manual. Failure to replace
the Belt and Retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in
collisions.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
131
Safety belt height adjustment
Your vehicle has safety belt height
adjustments at the front outboard
seating positions. Adjust the height
of the shoulder belt so the belt rests
across the middle of your shoulder.
To adjust the shoulder belt height,
squeeze and hold the buttons on the
side and slide the height adjuster up
or down. Release the buttons and
pull down on the height adjuster to
make sure it is locked in place.
Position the safety belt height adjusters so that the belt rests
across the middle of your shoulder. Failure to adjust the safety
belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt and
increase the risk of injury in a collision.
Safety belt pretensioner
Your vehicle is equipped with safety belt pretensioners at the driver and
front passenger seating positions.
The safety belt pretensioners activate during frontal collisions, and in
side collisions and rollovers when the vehicle is equipped with the Safety
Canopy娂 system. A safety belt pretensioner is a device which tightens
the webbing of the lap and shoulder belts in such a way that they fit
more snugly against the body.
The driver and front outboard passenger safety belt system (including
retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be replaced if the vehicle
is involved in a collision that results in the activation of the safety belt
pretensioners. Refer to the Safety belt maintenance section in this
chapter.
Failure to replace the safety belt assembly under the above
conditions could result in severe personal injuries in the event of
a collision.
Safety belt extension assembly
If the safety belt is too short when fully extended, there is an 8 inch
(20 cm) safety belt extension assembly that can be added (part number
611C22). This assembly can be obtained from your dealer at no cost.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
132
Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety
belt. Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on
the label. Also, use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too
short for you when fully extended.
Do not use extensions to change the fit of the shoulder belt
across the torso.
Safety belt warning light and indicator chime
The safety belt warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster and a
chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten their safety belts.
Conditions of operation
If... Then...
The driver’s safety belt is not
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the ON
position...
The safety belt warning light
illuminates 1 minute and the warning
chime sounds 6 seconds.
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled while the indicator
light is illuminated and the
warning chime is sounding...
The safety belt warning light and
warning chime turn off.
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the ON
position...
The safety belt warning light and
indicator chime remain off.
BeltMinder
The BeltMinder feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt
warning function. This feature provides additional reminders by
intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning
lamp in the instrument cluster when the driver’s and front passenger’s
safety belt is unbuckled.
The BeltMinder feature uses information from the passenger occupant
classification sensor to determine if a front seat passenger is present and
therefore potentially in need of a warning. To avoid activating the
BeltMinder feature for objects placed in the front passenger seat,
warnings will only be given to large front seat occupants as determined
by the passenger occupant classification sensor.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
133
Both the driver’s and passenger’s safety belt usages are monitored and
either may activate the BeltMinder feature. The warnings are the same
for the driver and the front passenger. If the BeltMinder warnings have
expired (warnings for approximately 5 minutes) for one occupant (driver
or front passenger), the other occupant can still activate the BeltMinder
feature.
If... Then...
The driver’s and front
passenger’s safety belts are
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the ON
position or less than 1-2
minutes have elapsed since the
ignition switch has been turned
ON...
The BeltMinder feature will not
activate.
The driver’s or front
passenger’s safety belt is not
buckled when the vehicle has
reached at least 5 km/h (3
mph) and 1-2 minutes have
elapsed since the ignition
switch has been turned to
ON...
The BeltMinder feature is activated -
the safety belt warning light
illuminates and the warning chime
sounds for 6 seconds every 30
seconds, repeating for approximately
5 minutes or until the safety belts are
buckled.
The driver’s or front
passenger’s safety belt becomes
unbuckled for approximately 1
minute while the vehicle is
traveling at least 5 km/h (3
mph) and more than 1-2
minutes have elapsed since the
ignition switch has been turned
to ON...
The BeltMinder feature is activated -
the safety belt warning light
illuminates and the warning chime
sounds for 6 seconds every 30
seconds, repeating for approximately
5 minutes or until the safety belts are
buckled.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
134
The following are reasons most often given for not wearing safety belts:
(All statistics based on U.S. data)
Reasons given... Consider...
⬙Crashes are rare events⬙ 36700 crashes occur every day. The
more we drive, the more we are
exposed to ⬙rare⬙ events, even for
good drivers. 1 in 4 of us will be
seriously injured in a crash during
our lifetime.
⬙I’m not going far⬙ 3of4fatal crashes occur within 25
miles of home.
⬙Belts are uncomfortable⬙ Ford designs its safety belts to
enhance comfort. If you are
uncomfortable - try different positions
for the safety belt upper anchorage
and seatback which should be as
upright as possible; this can improve
comfort.
⬙I was in a hurry⬙ Prime time for an accident.
BeltMinder reminds us to take a few
seconds to buckle up.
⬙Seat belts don’t work⬙ Safety belts, when used properly,
reduce risk of death to front seat
occupants by 45% in cars, and by
60% in light trucks.
⬙Traffic is light⬙ Nearly 1 of 2 deaths occur in
single-vehicle crashes, many when
no other vehicles are around.
⬙Belts wrinkle my clothes⬙ Possibly, but a serious crash can do
much more than wrinkle your clothes,
particularly if you are unbelted.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
135
Reasons given... Consider...
⬙The people I’m with don’t
wear belts⬙
Set the example, teen deaths occur 4
times more often in vehicles with
TWO or MORE people. Children and
younger brothers/sisters imitate
behavior they see.
⬙I have an air bag⬙ Air bags offer greater protection when
used with safety belts. Frontal airbags
are not designed to inflate in rear and
side crashes or rollovers.
⬙I’d rather be thrown clear⬙ Not a good idea. People who are
ejected are 40 times more likely
to DIE. Safety belts help prevent
ejection, WE CAN’T ⬙PICK OUR
CRASH⬙.
Do not sit on top of a buckled safety belt to avoid the Belt
Minder chime. Sitting on the safety belt will increase the risk of
injury in an accident. To disable (one-time) or deactivate the Belt
Minder feature please follow the directions stated below.
One time disable
If at any time the driver/front passenger quickly buckles then unbuckles
the BeltMinder feature for that seating position, the BeltMinder is
disabled for the current ignition cycle. The BeltMinder feature will
re-enable during the same ignition cycle if the occupant buckles and
remains buckled for approximately 30 seconds. Confirmation is not given
for the one time disable.
Deactivating/activating the BeltMinder feature
The driver and front passenger BeltMinder are
deactivated/activated independently. When deactivating/activating
one seating position, do not buckle the other position as this will
terminate the process.
Read steps1-4thoroughly before proceeding with the
deactivation/activation programming procedure.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
136
The driver and front passenger BeltMinder features can be
deactivated/activated by performing the following procedure:
Before following the procedure, make sure that:
• The parking brake is set
• The gearshift is in P (Park)
• The ignition switch is in the OFF position
• The driver and front passenger safety belts are unbuckled
To reduce the risk of injury, do not deactivate/activate the Belt
Minder feature while driving the vehicle.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN (or ON) position. (DO NOT
START THE ENGINE)
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off. (Approximately 1
minute)
• Step 3 must be completed within 50 seconds after the safety belt
warning light turns off.
3. For the seating position being disabled, buckle then unbuckle the
safety belt 9 times, ending in the unbuckled state. (Step 3 must be
completed within 50 seconds after the safety belt warning light turns
off.)
• After step 3, the restraint system warning light (airbag light) will be
turned on for three seconds.
4. Within 10 seconds of the light turning on, buckle then unbuckle the
safety belt.
• This will disable the BeltMinder feature for that seating position if it is
currently enabled. As confirmation, the restraint system warning light
will flash 4 times per second for 3 seconds.
• This will enable the BeltMinder feature for that seating position if it is
currently disabled. As confirmation, the restraint system warning light
will flash 4 times per second for 3 seconds, followed by 3 seconds with
the light off, then followed by the restraint system warning light
flashing 4 times per second for 3 seconds again.
• After receiving confirmation, the deactivation/activation procedure is
complete.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
137
Safety belt maintenance
Inspect the safety belt systems periodically to make sure they work
properly and are not damaged. Inspect the safety belts to make sure
there are no nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if necessary. All safety belt
assemblies, including retractors, buckles, front seat belt buckle
assemblies, buckle support assemblies (slide bar-if equipped), shoulder
belt height adjusters (if equipped), shoulder belt guide on seatback (if
equipped), child safety seat LATCH and tether anchors, and attaching
hardware, should be inspected after a collision. Ford Motor Company
recommends that all safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles involved in
a collision be replaced. However, if the collision was minor and a
qualified technician finds that the belts do not show damage and
continue to operate properly, they do not need to be replaced. Safety
belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and
replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted.
Failure to inspect and if necessary replace the safety belt
assembly under the above conditions could result in severe
personal injuries in the event of a collision.
Refer to Interior in the Cleaning chapter.
AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
E
C
MPH
4x4
H
F
60
40
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
20
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
180
80
100
120
km/h
RPM X 1000
A/C
MAX
A/C
1
2
3
4
AC
4X4
AUTO
ON
RSM
SET
ACC
CST
ON
OFF
SHUFFLECDCD
BASS
CD
TREB BAL FADE
SCN
AUTO
SET
AM
FM
VOL - PUSH ON
SEEK
EJ
COMP
DISC
TUNE
123456
FM1
ST
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
138
Important SRS precautions
The SRS is designed to work with
the safety belt to help protect the
driver and right front passenger
from certain upper body injuries. Air
bags DO NOT inflate slowly; there is
a risk of injury from a deploying air
bag.
All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always
properly wear their safety belts, even when an air bag
supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.
Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back
seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints.
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)
recommends a minimum distance of at least 10 inches (25 cm)
between an occupant’s chest and the driver air bag module.
Never place your arm over the air bag module as a deploying air
bag can result in serious arm fractures or other injuries.
To properly position yourself away from the air bag:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the
pedals comfortably.
• Recline the seat slightly one or two degrees from the upright position.
Do not put anything on or over the air bag module. Placing
objects on or over the air bag inflation area may cause those
objects to be propelled by the air bag into your face and torso causing
serious injury.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
139
Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the air bag
supplemental restraint systems or its fuses. See your Ford or
Lincoln Mercury dealer.
Modifications to the front end of the vehicle, including frame,
bumper, front end body structure, tow hooks and B-pillar
surrounding parts may affect the performance of the air bag sensors
increasing the risk of injury. Do not modify the front end of the
vehicle.
Additional equipment may affect the performance of the air bag
sensors increasing the risk of injury. Please refer to the Body
Builders Layout Book for instructions about the appropriate
installation of additional equipment.
Children and air bags
Children must always be properly
restrained. Accident statistics
suggest that children are safer when
properly restrained in the rear
seating positions than in the front
seating position. Failure to follow
these instructions may increase the
risk of injury in a collision.
Air bags can kill or injure a
child in a child seat.
NEVER place a rear-facing child
seat in front of an active air bag. If
you must use a forward-facing
child seat in the front seat, move
the seat all the way back.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
140
How does the air bag supplemental restraint system work?
The air bag SRS is designed to
activate when the vehicle sustains a
longitudinal deceleration sufficient
to cause the air bag sensors to close
an electrical circuit that initiates air
bag inflation. The fact that the air
bags did not inflate in a collision
does not mean that something is
wrong with the system. Rather, it
means the forces were not sufficient
enough to cause activation. Front air
bags are designed to inflate in
frontal and near-frontal collisions, not rollover, side-impact, or
rear-impacts unless the collision causes sufficient longitudinal
deceleration.
The air bags inflate and deflate
rapidly upon activation. After air bag
deployment, it is normal to notice a
smoke-like, powdery residue or
smell the burnt propellant. This may
consist of cornstarch, talcum
powder or sodium compounds which
may irritate the skin and eyes, but
none of the residue is toxic.
While the SRS is designed to help
reduce serious injuries, contact with
a deploying air bag may also cause
abrasions, swelling or temporary
hearing loss. Because air bags must
inflate rapidly and with considerable
force, there is the risk of death or
serious injuries such as fractures, facial and eye injuries or internal
injuries, particularly to occupants who are not properly restrained or are
otherwise out of position at the time of air bag deployment. It is
extremely important that occupants be properly restrained as far away
from the air bag module as possible while maintaining vehicle control.
The SRS consists of:
• driver and passenger air bag modules (which include the inflators and
air bags)
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
141
• one or more impact and safing sensors
• a readiness light and tone
• a diagnostic module
• and the electrical wiring which connects the components
The RCM (restraints control module) monitors its own internal circuits
and the supplemental air bag electrical system wiring (including the
impact sensors, the system wiring, the air bag system readiness light, the
air bag back up power and the air bag ignitors).
Several air bag system components get hot after inflation. Do not
touch them after inflation.
If the air bag has deployed, the air bag will not function
again and must be replaced immediately. If the air bag is not
replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a
collision.
Front passenger sensing system
The front passenger sensing system will turn off the front passenger’s
frontal air bag under certain conditions. The front passenger
seat-mounted side air bag (if equipped) will be deactivated if the sensor
detects an empty seat; otherwise, the seat-mounted side air bag will be
enabled. The front passenger sensing system works with sensors that are
part of the front passenger’s seat and safety belt. The sensors are
designed to detect the presence of a properly-seated occupant and
determine if the front passenger’s frontal air bag should be enabled (may
inflate) or not.
The front passenger sensing system is designed to meet the regulatory
requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) 208
and is designed to turn off the front passenger’s frontal air bag if:
• the front passenger seat is unoccupied, or has small/medium objects in
the front seat,
• the system determines that an infant is present in a rear-facing infant
seat that is installed according to the manufacturer’s instructions,
• the system determines that a small child is present in a forward-facing
child restraint that is installed according to the manufacturer’s
instructions,
• the system determines that a small child is present in a booster seat,
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
142
• a front passenger takes his/her weight off of the seat for a period of
time,
• A smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown child restraints,
or a small adult occupies the front passenger seat.
Even with the front passenger sensing system, children 12 and
under should be properly restrained in the back seat.
When the front passenger seat is
occupied and the sensing system
has turned off the passenger’s
frontal air bag, the ⬙passenger airbag
off⬙ or ⬙pass airbag off⬙ indicator will
light and stay lit to remind you that
the front passenger frontal air bag is
off. When the front passenger seat is
not occupied (empty seat) or in the event that the front passenger
frontal air bag is enabled (may inflate), the indicator light will be unlit.
The indicator light is located in the center stack of the instrument panel
just below the radio.
The front passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the front
passenger’s frontal air bag when a rear facing infant seat, a
forward-facing child restraint, or a booster seat is detected. If the child
restraint has been installed and the indicator is not lit, then turn the
vehicle off, remove the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the
restraint following the child restraint manufacturer’s directions.
The front passenger sensing system is designed to enable (may inflate)
the right front passenger’s frontal air bag anytime the system senses that
a person of adult size is sitting properly in the front passenger seat.
When the passenger sensing system has allowed the air bag to be
enabled, the indicator will be unlit and stay unlit to remind you that the
air bag is enabled (may inflate).
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the front passenger’s seat, but the
⬙passenger air bag off⬙ or ⬙pass air bag off⬙ indicator is lit, it could be
that the person isn’t sitting properly in the seat. If this happens, turn the
vehicle off and ask the person to place the seatback in the full upright
position, then sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion, with
the person’s legs comfortably extended. Restart the vehicle and have the
person remain in this position for about two minutes. This will allow the
system to detect that person and then enable the passenger’s air bag. If
the indicator lamp remains lit even after this, then the occupant should
be advised to ride in the back seat.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
143
After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on seatbelts, it’s
very important that they continue to sit upright, with their back against
the seatback, with their feet comfortably extended on the floor while the
vehicle is still in motion. Sitting improperly can increase the chance of
injury in a crash event. For example, if an occupant slouches, lies down,
turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or sideways, or puts one or
both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is greatly increased.
Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat back reclined
too far can take off weight from the seat cushion and affect the
decision of the passenger sensing system, resulting in serious injury or
death in a crash. Always sit upright against your seatback, with your
feet on the floor.
The front passenger sensing system may detect small or medium objects
placed on the seat cushion. For most objects that are in the front
passenger seat, the passenger airbag will be disabled. Even though the
passenger airbag is disabled, the ⬙pass airbag off⬙ light may or may not
be illuminated according to the table below.
Objects
Pass Airbag Off
Indicator Light
Passenger Airbag
Empty seat Unlit Disabled
Small (i.e. 3 ring binder,
small purse, bottled water)
Unlit Disabled
Medium (i.e. heavy
briefcase, fully packed
luggage)
Lit Disabled
Empty seat, Small or
medium object with safety
belt buckled
Lit Disabled
In case there is a problem with the
passenger sensing system, the
airbag readiness light in the
instrument cluster will stay lit. DO
NOT attempt to repair or service the system; take your vehicle
immediately to the dealer.
In case there is a problem with the passenger sensing system, the airbag
readiness light in the instrument cluster will stay lit. Do NOT attempt to
repair or service the system; take your vehicle immediately to the dealer.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
144
If it is necessary to modify an advanced front air bag system to
accommodate a person with disabilities, contact the Ford Customer
Relationship Center at the phone number shown in the Customer
Assistance section of this Owner’s Guide.
Any alteration/modification to the front passenger seat may
affect the performance of the front passenger sensing system.
Determining if the system is operational
The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to
indicate the status of the system. Refer to Air bag readiness section in
the Instrument cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the air bag is
not required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following:
• The readiness light will either
flash or stay lit.
• The readiness light will not
illuminate immediately after
ignition is turned on.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and/or light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced at
your dealership or by a qualified technician immediately. Unless serviced,
the system may not function properly in the event of a collision.
Safety Canopy姟 system (if equipped)
Do not place objects or
mount equipment on or
near the headliner at the siderail
that may come into contact with a
deploying Safety Canopy娂. Failure
to follow these instructions may
increase the risk of personal injury
in the event of a collision.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
145
Do not lean your head on the door. The Safety Canopy娂 could
injure you as it deploys from the headliner.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the Safety Canopy娂
system, its fuses, the A, B, or C pillar trim, or the headliner on a
vehicle containing a Safety Canopy娂. See your Ford or Lincoln
Mercury dealer.
All occupants of the vehicle including the driver should always
wear their safety belts even when an air bag SRS and Safety
Canopy娂 system is provided.
To reduce risk of injury, do not obstruct or place objects in the
deployment path of the inflatable Safety Canopy娂.
How does the Safety Canopy姟 system work?
The design and development of the
Safety Canopy娂 system included
recommended testing procedures
that were developed by a group of
automotive safety experts known as
the Side Air Bag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing
procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of
side airbags (including the Safety
Canopy娂).
The Safety Canopy娂 system
consists of the following:
• An inflatable nylon curtain with a
gas generator concealed behind
the headliner and above the doors
(one on each side of vehicle).
• A headliner designed to flex open
above the side doors to allow Safety Canopy娂 deployment.
• The same warning light, electronic control and diagnostic unit as used
for the front airbags.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
146
• Two crash sensors mounted at lower B-Pillar (one on each side).
• Two crash sensors located at the c-pillar behind the rear doors (one
on each side).
• Rollover sensor in the restraints control module (RCM).
The Safety Canopy娂 system, in combination with seat belts, can help
reduce the risk of severe injuries in the event of a significant side impact
collision or rollover event.
Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in
the second or third row seats. The Safety Canopy娂 will not interfere
with children restrained using a properly installed child or booster seat
because it is designed to inflate downward from the headliner above the
doors along the side window opening.
The Safety Canopy system is designed to active when the vehicle
sustains lateral deceleration sufficient to cause the RCM to initiate Safety
Canopy inflation or when a certain likelihood of a rollover event is
detected by the rollover sensor.
The Safety Canopy娂 is mounted to roof side-rail sheet metal, behind the
headliner, above the first and second row seats. The Safety Canopy娂 is
designed to inflate between the side window area and occupants to
further enhance protection provided in side impact collisions and rollover
events.
The fact that the Safety Canopy娂 did not activate in a collision does not
mean that something is wrong with the system. Rather, it means the
forces were not of the type sufficient to cause activation. The Safety
Canopy娂 is designed to inflate in certain side impact collisions or
rollover events, not in rear impact, frontal or near-frontal collisions,
unless the collision causes sufficient lateral deceleration or rollover
likelihood.
Several Safety Canopy娂
system components get hot
after inflation. Do not touch them
after inflation.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
147
If the Safety Canopy娂 system has deployed, the Safety
Canopy娂 will not function again unless replaced. The
Safety Canopy娂 system (including the A, B and C pillar trim)
must be inspected and serviced by a qualified technician in
accordance with the vehicle service manual. If the Safety
Canopy娂 is not replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of
injury in a collision.
Determining if the system is operational
The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to
indicate the condition of the system. Refer to the Air bag readiness
section in the Instrument cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the
side air bag is not required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following:
• The readiness light (same light as for front air bag system) will either
flash or stay lit.
• The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is
turned on.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and/or light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced
at your dealership or by a qualified technician immediately. Unless
serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a
collision.
Side air bag system (if equipped)
Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near the air bag
cover on the side of the seatbacks of the front seats or in front
seat areas that may come into contact with a deploying air bag. Failure
to follow these instructions may increase the risk of personal injury in
the event of a collision.
Do not use accessory seat covers. The use of accessory seat
covers may prevent the deployment of the side air bags and
increase the risk of injury in an accident.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
148
Do not lean your head on the door. The side air bag could injure
you as it deploys from the side of the seatback.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the air bag SRS, its
fuses or the seat cover on a seat containing an air bag. See your
Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealer.
All occupants of the vehicle should always wear their safety belts
even when an air bag SRS is provided.
How does the side air bag system work?
The design and development of the
side air bag system included
recommended testing procedures
that were developed by a group of
automotive safety experts known as
the Side Air Bag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing
procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of
side air bags.
The side air bag system consists of
the following:
• An inflatable nylon bag (air bag)
with a gas generator concealed
behind the outboard bolster of
the driver and front passenger
seatbacks.
• A special seat cover designed to allow airbag deployment.
• The same warning light, electronic control and diagnostic unit as used
for the front air bags.
• Two crash sensors located on the lower portion of the b-pillar (one on
each side of the vehicle).
Side air bags, in combination with seat belts, can help reduce the risk of
severe injuries in the event of a significant side impact collision.
The side air bags are fitted on the outboard side of the seatbacks of the
front seats. In certain lateral collisions, the air bag on the side affected
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
149
by the collision will be inflated. If the front passenger sensing system
detects an empty seat, the front passenger seat-mounted side air bag will
be deactivated. The air bag was designed to inflate between the door
panel and occupant to further enhance the protection provided
occupants in side impact collisions.
The air bag SRS is designed to activate when the vehicle sustains lateral
deceleration sufficient to cause the sensors to close an electrical circuit
that initiates air bag inflation.
The fact that the air bags did not inflate in a collision does not mean that
something is wrong with the system. Rather, it means the forces were
not of the type sufficient to cause activation. Side air bags are designed
to inflate in side-impact collisions, not roll-over, rear-impact, frontal or
near-frontal collisions, unless the collision causes sufficient lateral
deceleration.
Several air bag system components get hot after inflation. Do not
touch them after inflation.
If the side air bag has
deployed, the air bag will
not function again. The side
air bag system (including the
seat) must be inspected and
serviced by a qualified
technician in accordance with
the vehicle service manual. If
the air bag is not replaced, the
unrepaired area will increase the
risk of injury in a collision.
Determining if the system is operational
The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to
indicate the condition of the system. Refer to the Air bag readiness
section in the Instrument cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the
side air bag is not required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following:
• The readiness light (same light as for front air bag system) will either
flash or stay lit.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
150
• The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is
turned on.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and/or light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced
at your dealership or by a qualified technician immediately. Unless
serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a
collision.
Disposal of air bags and air bag equipped vehicles (including
pretensioners)
See your local dealership or qualified technician. Air bags MUST BE
disposed of by qualified personnel.
SAFETY RESTRAINTS FOR CHILDREN
See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety
restraints for children. Also see Air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) in this chapter for special instructions about using air bags.
Important child restraint precautions
You are required by law to use safety restraints for children in the U.S.
and Canada. If small children (generally children who are four years old
or younger and who weigh 40 lb. [18 kg] or less) ride in your vehicle, you
must put them in safety seats made especially for children. Many states
require that children use approved booster seats until they are eight
years old. Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific
requirements regarding the safety of children in your vehicle. When
possible, always place children under age 12 in the rear seat of your
vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating position.
Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the
vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from
injury in a collision.
Always follow the instructions and warnings that come with any infant or
child restraint you might use.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
151
Children and safety belts
If the child is the proper size, restrain the child in a safety seat. Children
who are too large for child safety seats (as specified by your child safety
seat manufacturer) should always wear safety belts.
Follow all the important safety restraint and air bag precautions that
apply to adult passengers in your vehicle.
If the shoulder belt portion of a combination lap and shoulder belt can
be positioned so it does not cross or rest in front of the child’s face or
neck, the child should wear the lap and shoulder belt. Moving the child
closer to the center of the vehicle may help provide a good shoulder belt
fit.
Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets unattended in
your vehicle.
Child booster seats
Children outgrow a typical convertible or toddler seat when they weigh
40 pounds (18 kg) and are around 4 years of age. Although the
lap/shoulder belt will provide some protection, these children are still too
small for lap/shoulder belts to fit properly, which could increase the risk
of serious injury.
To improve the fit of both the lap and shoulder belt on children who
have outgrown child safety seats, Ford Motor Company recommends use
of a belt-positioning booster.
Booster seats position a child so that safety belts fit better. They lift the
child up so that the lap belt rests low across the hips and the knees
bend comfortably. Booster seats also make the shoulder belt fit better
and more comfortably for growing children.
When children should use booster seats
Children need to use booster seats from the time they outgrow the
toddler seat until they are big enough for the vehicle seat and
lap/shoulder belt to fit properly. Generally this is when they weigh about
80 lb. (36 kg) (about 8 to 12 years old).
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
152
Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these
questions:
• Can the child sit all the way back
against the vehicle seat back with
knees bent comfortably at the
edge of the seat without
slouching?
• Does the lap belt rest low across the hips?
• Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest?
• Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
Types of booster seats
There are two types of belt-positioning booster seats:
• Those that are backless.
If your backless booster seat has a
removable shield, remove the
shield and use the lap/shoulder
belt. If a seating position has a
low seat back and no head
restraint, a backless booster seat
may place your child’s head (top
of ear level) above the top of the
seat. In this case, move the
backless booster to another
seating position with a higher seat back and lap/shoulder belts.
• Those with a high back.
If, with a backless booster seat,
you cannot find a seating position
that adequately supports your
child’s head, a high back booster
seat would be a better choice.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
153
Both can be used in any vehicle in a seating position equipped with
lap/shoulder belts if your child is over 40 lb. (18 kg).
The shoulder belt should cross the chest, resting snugly on the center of
the shoulder. The lap belt should rest low and snug across the hips,
never up high across the stomach.
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat, placing a rubberized mesh
sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this
condition.
The importance of shoulder belts
Using a booster without a shoulder belt increases the risk of a child’s
head hitting a hard surface in a collision. For this reason, you should
never use a booster seat with a lap belt only. It is best to use a booster
seat with lap/shoulder belts in the back seat- the safest place for children
to ride.
Follow all instructions provided by the manufacturer of the
booster seat.
Never put the shoulder belt under a child’s arm or behind the
back because it eliminates the protection for the upper part of
the body and may increase the risk of injury or death in a collision.
Never use pillows, books, or towels to boost a child. They can
slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or death in a
collision.
SAFETY SEATS FOR CHILDREN
Child and infant or child safety seats
Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight of the
child. Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions with the
safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install and use the
safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden stop or
collision.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
154
When installing a child safety seat:
• Review and follow the information
presented in the Air bag
supplemental restraint system
(SRS) section in this chapter.
• Use the correct safety belt buckle
for that seating position (the
buckle closest to the direction the
tongue is coming from).
• Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle until you hear a
snap and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the
buckle.
• Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety
seat, with the tongue between the child seat and the release button,
to prevent accidental unbuckling.
• Place seat back in upright position.
• Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode. Refer to Automatic
locking mode (passenger side front and outboard rear seating
positions) (if equipped) section in this chapter.
• LATCH lower anchors are recommended for use by children up to 48
pounds (22 kg) in a child restraint. Top tether anchors can be used
for children up to 60 pounds (27 kg) in a child restraint, and to
provide upper torso restraint for children up to 80 pounds (36 kg)
using an upper torso harness and a belt-positioning booster.
Ford recommends the use of a child safety seat having a top tether
strap. Install the child safety seat in a seating position with LATCH and
tether anchors. For more information on top tether straps and anchors,
refer to Attaching safety seats with tether straps in this chapter. For
more information of LATCH anchors refer to Attaching safety seats with
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children) attachments in this
chapter.
Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions included
with the safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install
and use the safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden
stop or collision.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
155
Rear-facing child seats or infant carriers should never be placed
in the front seats.
Installing child safety seats with combination lap and shoulder belts
The rear seat head restraints must be removed when using a child
seat.
Air bags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. NEVER place a
rear-facing child seat in front of an active air bag. If you must
use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the seat all the
way back.
1. Position the child safety seat in a
seat with a combination lap and
shoulder belt.
Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in the rear
seat whenever possible.
2. Pull down on the shoulder belt
and then grasp the shoulder belt
and lap belt together.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
156
3. While holding the shoulder and
lap belt portions together, route the
tongue through the child seat
according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure
the belt webbing is not twisted.
4. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) for that seating position until
you hear a snap and feel the latch
engage. Make sure the tongue is
latched securely by pulling on it.
5. To put the retractor in the
automatic locking mode, grasp the
shoulder portion of the belt and pull
downward until all of the belt is
extracted and a click is heard.
6. Allow the belt to retract. The belt will click as it retracts to indicate it
is in the automatic locking mode.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
157
7. Pull the lap belt portion across
the child seat toward the buckle and
pull up on the shoulder belt while
pushing down with your knee on the
child seat.
8. Allow the safety belt to retract to
remove any slack in the belt.
9. Before placing the child in the
seat, forcibly tilt the seat forward
and back to make sure the seat is
securely held in place. To check
this, grab the seat at the belt path
and attempt to move it side to side
and forward and back. There should
be no more than one inch of
movement for proper installation.
10. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is
in the automatic locking mode (you should not be able to pull more belt
out). If the retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt and repeat steps
two through nine.
Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each use.
Attaching child safety seats with tether straps
Most new forward-facing child safety seats include a tether strap which
goes over the back of the seat and hooks to an anchoring point. Tether
straps are available as an accessory for many older safety seats. Contact
the manufacturer of your child seat for information about ordering a
tether strap.
The rear seating positions of your vehicle are equipped with built-in
tether strap anchors located behind the seats on the roof panel in the
cargo area.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
158
The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are in the following positions:
Attach the tether strap only
to the appropriate tether
anchor as shown. The tether strap
may not work properly if attached
somewhere other than the correct
tether anchor.
1. Position the child safety seat on the seat cushion.
2. Route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the seat.
For vehicles with adjustable head restraints, remove the head restraint
first, place under the front seat for storage, and then route the tether
strap over the top of the seatback.
3. Locate the correct anchor for the
selected seating position.
There are three tether anchors
located on the headliner at the rear
of the vehicle.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
159
4. Clip the tether strap to the
anchor as shown.
The arrow in the above graphic
points toward the front of the
vehicle.
If the tether strap is clipped incorrectly, the child safety seat
may not be retained properly in the event of a collision.
5. Install the child safety seat tightly using the LATCH anchors or safety
belts. Follow the instructions in this chapter.
6. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child
being injured in a collision greatly increases.
Attaching safety seats with LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children) attachments for child seat anchors
Some child safety seats have two rigid or webbing mounted attachments
that connect to two anchors at certain seating positions in your vehicle.
This type of child seat eliminates the need to use seat belts to attach the
child seat. For forward-facing child seats, the tether strap must also be
attached to the proper tether anchor. See Attaching safety seats with
tether straps in this chapter.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
160
Your vehicle has LATCH anchors for child seat installation at the
following locations:
The anchors on both sides of the
center of the rear seat are provided
primarily for child seats at the
outboard seats, and are further
apart than the pairs of lower
anchors for child seat installation at
other seats. A child seat with rigid
LATCH attachments cannot be
installed at the center rear seat. A
child seat with LATCH attachments on belt webbing can be used at the
center rear seat unless a child seat at an outboard rear seat is attached
to one of these lower anchors. Install a child seat onto the lower anchors
at the center rear seat ONLY IF the child restraint manufacturer
recommends that the child seat can be installed to anchors that are
spaced up to 20 inches (500 mm) apart.
Never attach two LATCH child safety seats to the same anchor.
In a crash, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold two
child safety seat attachments and may break, causing serious injury or
death.
The lower anchors for child seat
installation are located at the rear
section of the second row seat
between the cushion and seat back.
The LATCH anchors are below the
locator symbols on the seat back.
Follow the child seat manufacturer’s instructions to properly install a
child seat with LATCH attachments.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
161
Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child seat only to the
anchors shown.
If you install a child seat with rigid LATCH attachments, do not tighten
the tether strap enough to lift the child seat off the vehicle seat cushion
when the child is seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug without
lifting the front of the child seat. Keeping the child seat just touching the
vehicle seat gives the best protection in a severe crash.
Each time you use the safety seat, check that the seat is properly
attached to the lower anchors and tether anchor. Try to tilt the child
seat from side to side. Also try to tug the seat forward. Check to see if
the anchors hold the seat in place.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child
being injured in a crash greatly increases.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
162
NOTICE TO UTILITY VEHICLE AND TRUCK OWNERS
Utility vehicles and trucks handle
differently than passenger cars in
the various driving conditions that
are encountered on streets,
highways and off-road. Utility
vehicles and trucks are not designed
for cornering at speeds as high as
passenger cars any more than
low-slung sports cars are designed
to perform satisfactorily under
off-road conditions.
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than
other types of vehicles. To reduce the risk of serious injury or
death from a rollover or other crash you must:
• Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers;
• Drive at safe speeds for the conditions;
• Keep tires properly inflated;
• Never overload or improperly load your vehicle; and
• Make sure every passenger is properly restrained.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely
to die than a person wearing a seat belt. All occupants must
wear safety belts and children/infants must use appropriate restraints
to minimize the risk of injury or ejection.
Study your “Owner’s Guide” and any supplements for specific
information about equipment features, instructions for safe driving and
additional precautions to reduce the risk of an accident or serious injury.
VEHICLE CHARACTERISTICS
4WD and AWD Systems
A vehicle equipped with AWD or 4WD has the ability to use all four
wheels to power itself. This increases traction which may enable you to
safely drive over terrain and road conditions that a conventional
two-wheel drive vehicle cannot.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Tires, Wheels and Loading
163
Power is supplied to all four wheels through a transfer case or power
transfer unit. 4WD vehicles allow you to select different drive modes as
necessary. You should become thoroughly familiar with this information
before you operate your vehicle.
Do not become overconfident in the ability of 4WD and AWD
vehicles. Although a 4WD or AWD vehicle may accelerate better
than two-wheel drive vehicle in low traction situations, it won’t stop
any faster than two-wheel drive vehicles. Always drive at a safe speed.
How your vehicle differs from other vehicles
SUV and trucks can differ from
some other vehicles in a few
noticeable ways. Your vehicle may
be:
• Higher – to allow higher load
carrying capacity and to allow it
to travel over rough terrain
without getting hung up or
damaging underbody components.
• Shorter – to give it the capability
to approach inclines and drive
over the crest of a hill without
getting hung up or damaging
underbody components. All other
things held equal, a shorter
wheelbase may make your vehicle quicker to respond to steering
inputs than a vehicle with a longer wheelbase.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
164
• Narrower — to provide greater
maneuverability in tight spaces,
particularly in off-road use.
As a result of the above dimensional
differences, SUV’s and trucks often
will have a higher center of gravity
and a greater difference in center of
gravity between the loaded and
unloaded condition.
These differences that make your
vehicle so versatile also make it
handle differently than an ordinary
passenger car.
INFORMATION ABOUT UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
New vehicles are fitted with tires
that have a rating on them called
Tire Quality Grades. The Quality
grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For
example:
• Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United
States Department of Transportation has set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic tires for use on passenger
cars. They do not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires,
space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim
diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in
Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2).
U.S. Department of Transportation-Tire quality grades: The U.S.
Department of Transportation requires Ford to give you the following
information about tire grades exactly as the government has written it.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
165
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual
conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA A B C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The
grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature A B C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by
law.
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
166
TIRES
Tires are designed to give many thousands of miles of service, but they
must be maintained in order to get the maximum benefit from them.
Glossary of tire terminology
• Tire label: A label showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire sizes,
recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle
can carry.
• Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall of
each tire providing information about the tire brand and
manufacturing plant, tire size and date of manufacture.
• Inflation pressure: A measure of the amount of air in a tire.
• Standard load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
maximum load at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires]. Increasing
the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire’s
load carrying capability.
• Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
heavier maximum load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric tires].
Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase
the tire’s load carrying capability.
• kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pressure.
• PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard unit of air pressure.
• Cold inflation pressure: The tire pressure when the vehicle has
been stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and
prior to the vehicle being driven for 1 mile (1.6 km).
• Recommended inflation pressure: The cold inflation pressure found
on the tire label located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s
door.
• B-pillar: The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the
front door.
• Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next to the rim.
• Sidewall of the tire: Area between the bead area and the tread.
• Tread area of the tire: Area of the perimeter of the tire that
contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle.
• Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assembly
upon which the tire beads are seated.
INSPECTING AND INFLATING YOUR TIRES
Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly
inflated. Remember that a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure
without appearing flat.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
167
Every day before you drive, check
your tires. If one looks lower than
the others, use a tire gauge to check
pressure of all tires and adjust if
required.
At least once a month and before
long trips, inspect each tire and
check the tire pressure with a tire
gauge (including spare, if equipped).
Inflate all tires to the inflation
pressure recommended by Ford
Motor Company.
Inspecting your tires
Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and
remove stones, nails, glass or other objects that may be wedged in the
tread grooves. Check for holes or cuts that may permit air leakage from
the tire and make necessary repairs.
Also inspect the tire sidewalls for cuts, bruises and other damage. If
internal damage to the tire is suspected, have the tire demounted and
inspected in case it needs to be repaired or replaced. For your safety,
tires that are damaged should not be used because they are more likely
to blow out or fail. Tires can be damaged during off-road use, so
inspection after off-road use is also recommended.
Inflating your tires
Use a tire gauge to check the tire inflation pressure, including the spare
(if equipped), at least monthly and before long trips. You are strongly
urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge, as automatic service station
gauges may be inaccurate. Ford recommends the use of a digital or dial
type tire pressure gauge rather than a stick type tire pressure gauge.
Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire
performance and wear. Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause
uneven treadwear patterns.
Under-inflation is the most common cause of tire failures and
may result in severe tire cracking, tread separation or ⬙blowout⬙,
with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk of injury.
Under-inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling resistance,
resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire. It also may
result in unnecessary tire stress, irregular wear, loss of vehicle control
and accidents. A tire can lose up to half of its air pressure and not
appear to be flat!
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
168
Always inflate your tires to the Ford recommended inflation pressure
even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found
on the tire. The Ford recommended tire inflation pressure is found on
the tire label or certification label which is located on the B-Pillar or the
edge of the driver’s door. Failure to follow the tire pressure
recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and adversely
affect the way your vehicle handles.
Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure is the tire manufactures’
maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at which the
maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is normally
higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation pressure
which can be found on either the tire label or certification label which is
located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. The cold inflation
pressure should never be set lower than the recommended pressure on
the tire label or certification label.
When weather temperature changes occur, tire inflation pressures also
change. A 10° F(6° C) temperature drop can cause a corresponding
drop of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check your tire pressures
frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found
on the tire label or certification label.
If you are checking tire pressure when the tire is hot, (i.e. driven more
than 1 mile [1.6 km]), never “bleed” or reduce air pressure. The tires are
hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above
recommended cold pressures. A hot tire at or below recommended cold
inflation pressure could be significantly under-inflated.
To check the pressure in your tire(s):
1. Make sure the tires are cool, meaning they are not hot from driving
even a mile.
Note: If you have to drive a distance to get air for your tire(s), check
and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure
when you get to the pump. It is normal for tires to heat up and the air
pressure inside to go up as you drive. Never “bleed” or reduce air
pressure when tires are hot.
2. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire, then firmly press the tire
gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure with the tire gauge..
3. Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure
Note: If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the metal stem in
the center of the valve. Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge.
4. Replace the valve cap.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
169
5. Repeat this procedure for each tire, including the spare.
Note: Some spare tires require higher inflation pressure than the other
tires. Check the tire label on the B pillar or the edge of the driver’s door
for the recommended spare tire pressure.
6. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other
objects embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air
leak.
7. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts or bulges.
TIRE REPLACEMENT REQUIREMENTS
Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and
handling capability.
Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the same size
and type (such as P-metric versus LT-metric or all-season versus
all-terrain) as those originally provided by Ford. Use of any tire or
wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and
performance of your vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of
loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
Additionally the use of non-recommended tires and wheels could cause
steering, suspension, axle or transfer case/power transfer unit failure. If
you have questions regarding tire replacement, see an authorized Ford
or Lincoln/Mercury dealer.
NOTE: The use of a different tire can effect the fuel economy of your
vehicle.
Make sure all tires and wheels on the vehicle are of the same size, type,
tread design, brand, load-carrying capacity and speed rating because it
can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle, which could result
in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
You should replace the spare tire when you replace the other road tires
due to the aging of the spare tire.
CHANGING A FLAT TIRE
If you get a flat tire while driving:
• do not brake heavily.
• gradually decrease the vehicle’s speed.
• hold the steering wheel firmly.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
170
• slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road.
The use of tire sealants may damage your tires.
T-Type/Mini-Spare Tire Information (if equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a T-type/mini-spare tire. This tire will
have the words ⬙Temporary Use Only⬙ molded into the tire sidewall. This
spare tire is considered ⬙temporary⬙. Replace the T-type/mini-spare with
a tire of the same size, speed rating and load carrying capacity as the
other road tires as soon as possible.
When driving with the T-type/mini-spare tire do not:
• Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)
• Load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load rating listed on the
Safety Compliance Label
• Tow a trailer
• Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the T-type/mini spare
tire
• Use more than one T-type/mini spare tire at a time
• Use commercial car washing equipment
• Try to repair the T-type/mini spare tire
Use of a T-type/mini spare tire at any one wheel location can lead to
impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking performance
• Comfort and noise
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs
• Winter weather driving capability
• Wet weather driving capability
Dissimilar spare tire/wheel information (if equipped)
Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an increased
risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire/wheel. A
dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that is
different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels. If
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
171
you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel, then it is intended for temporary
use only. This means that if you need to use it, you should replace it as
soon as possible with a road tire/wheel that is the same size and type as
the road tires and wheels that were originally provided by Ford. If the
dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged, it should be replaced rather
than repaired.
When driving with the dissimilar spare tire/wheel, do not:
• Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h)
• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire/wheel at a time
• Use commercial car washing equipment
• Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare
tire/wheel
The usage of a dissimilar spare tire/wheel can lead to impairment of the
following:
• Handling, stability and braking performance
• Comfort and noise
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs
• Winter weather driving capability
• Wet weather driving capability
• All-Wheel driving capability (if applicable)
• Load leveling adjustment (if applicable)
When driving with the dissimilar spare tire/wheel additional caution
should be given to:
• Towing a trailer
• Driving vehicles equipped with a camper body
• Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo rack
Drive cautiously when using a dissimilar spare tire/wheel and seek
service as soon as possible.
Tire change procedure
When one of the front wheels is off the ground, the transmission
alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or slipping off the
jack, even if the vehicle is in P (Park).
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
172
To help prevent the vehicle from moving when you change a tire,
be sure the parking brake is set, then block (in both directions)
the wheel that is diagonally opposite (other side and end of the
vehicle) to the tire being changed.
If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone else could be
seriously injured.
1. Park on a level surface, activate
hazard flashers and place gearshift
lever in P (Park).
2. Set the parking brake and turn
engine off.
3. Block the diagonally opposite
wheel.
Removing the jack and tools
The jack and tools are located in the
right rear of the cargo area behind
an access panel.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
173
Remove the lug wrench from the
jack in order to remove the spare
tire from under the vehicle. To
remove jack from vehicle release the
thumbscrew on the bracket, release
the retention clip on the upper part
of the jack bracket, dislodge the
jack from the bracket and carefully
guide jack down and out through trim opening, upper end out first.
Removing the spare tire or spare tire and tether (if equipped)
1. Insert the lug wrench through the
access hole in the rear bumper.
2. Turn the handle counterclockwise
and lower the spare tire until it can
be slid rearward and the cable is
slack.
3. Slide the retainer through the
center of the wheel.
If equipped with a tether,
perform the following additional
steps:
4. Lift the spare tire on end to
access tether attachment (1).
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
174
5. Use the lug wrench to remove the
lug nut from the spare tire tether.
6. If not replacing the spare or flat
tire to the underbody storage area,
raise winch up into the installed
position.
7. Use the attached Velcro strap (2)
to tie the tether end to the winch
actuator shaft (if equipped).
Changing the flat tire
8. Loosen each wheel lug nut
one-half turn counterclockwise but
do not remove them until the wheel
is raised off the ground.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
175
Before placing the jack under the vehicle, NOTE the jack locations:
• Front
• Rear
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
176
9. Lower the jack from its stored
height to fit under the jacking
notches. Position the jack according
to the following guides and turn the
jack handle clockwise until the tire
is a maximum of 1 inch (25 mm) off
the ground.
Never use the differentials as a
jacking point.
To lessen the risk of
personal injury, do not put
any part of your body under the
vehicle while changing a tire. Do
not start the engine when your
vehicle is on the jack. The jack is
only meant for changing the tire.
10. Remove the lug nuts with the lug nut wrench.
11. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire, making sure the valve stem
is facing outward. Reinstall lug nuts until the wheel is snug against the
hub. Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has been lowered.
12. Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
13. Remove the jack and fully
tighten the lug nuts in the order
shown.
1
43
25
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
177
14. Reinstall the jack and tools in
the cargo area. To replace jack in
vehicle, guide the jack bottom first
in trim opening and position in
bracket, secure retention clip on
upper part of jack and close
thumbscrew. Make sure the jack is
fastened so it does not rattle when
you drive.
Stowing the flat/spare tire
Note: Failure to follow spare tire stowage instructions may result in
failure of cable or loss of spare tire.
If you are stowing a tire that requires reattaching it to the
vehicle with a tether, perform these steps first, then proceed with
the steps following.
1. Place tire on end with valve stem
facing rearward, away from vehicle.
2. Place tether into bolt holes in
wheel and attach lug nut using lug
wrench.
3. Lay the tire on the ground with the valve stem facing down. If your
vehicle is equipped with aluminum wheels, remove the wheel ornament.
4. Slide the wheel partially under the vehicle and install the retainer
through the center of the wheel.
5. Turn the jack handle clockwise until the tire is raised to its original
position underneath the vehicle. The effort to turn the jack handle
increases significantly as the tire contacts the frame. The spare tire
carrier will ratchet when the tire is in the fully stowed position. The
spare tire carrier has a built-in ratchet feature that will not allow you to
overtighten. If the spare tire carrier ratchets with very little effort, take
the vehicle to your dealer for assistance at your earliest convenience. If
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
178
your vehicle is equipped with a trailer hitch, guide the tire with
one hand; keep the rear of the tire tilted down until the tire
clears the bumper.
6. Check that the tire lies flat against the frame assembly. Push against
the tire to make sure it is tightly seated under the vehicle. Loosen and
retighten, if necessary. Failure to properly stow the spare tire may result
in failure of the winch cable and loss of the spare tire. (Make sure that
the tire does not contact the bumper.)
7. Repeat this tightness check procedure when servicing the spare tire
pressure (every six months, per Scheduled Maintenance Guide), or at
any time that the spare tire is disturbed through service of other
components.
WHEEL LUG NUT TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque at 500 miles (800 km)
after any wheel disturbance (tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel
removal, etc.).
Bolt size Wheel lug nut torque*
lb.ft. N•m
M12 x 1.5 100 135
* Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and
rust. Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners.
When a wheel is installed, always remove any corrosion, dirt or
foreign materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel
or the surface of the front disc brake hub and rotor that contacts the
wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the
wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the
wheel to come off while the vehicle is in motion, resulting in loss of
control.
INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE TIRE SIDEWALL
Federal law requires tire manufacturers to place standardized
information on the sidewall of all tires. This information identifies and
describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a
U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard certification and
in case of a recall.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
179
Information on “P” type tires
P215/65R15 95H is an example of a
tire size, load index and speed
rating. The definitions of these
items are listed below. (Note that
the tire size, load index and speed
rating for your vehicle may be
different from this example.)
1. P: Indicates a tire, designated by
the Tire and Rim Association
(T&RA), that may be used for
service on cars, SUVs, minivans and
light trucks.
Note: If your tire size does not
begin with a letter this may mean it
is designated by either ETRTO
(European Tire and Rim Technical Organization) or JATMA (Japan Tire
Manufacturing Association).
2. 215: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from
sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the
wider the tire.
3. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width.
4. R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.
5. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
6. 95: Indicates the tire’s load index. It is an index that relates to how
much weight a tire can carry. You may find this information in your
Owner’s Guide. If not, contact a local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
7. H: Indicates the tire’s speed rating. The speed rating denotes the
speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of
time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure. The tires
on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load and inflation
pressure. These speed ratings may need to be adjusted for the difference
in conditions. The ratings range from 81 mph (130 km/h) to 186 mph
(299 km/h). These ratings are listed in the following chart.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
180
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
Letter rating Speed rating - mph (km/h)
M 81 mph (130 km/h)
N 87 mph (140 km/h)
Q 99 mph (159 km/h)
R 106 mph (171 km/h)
S 112 mph (180 km/h)
T 118 mph (190 km/h)
U 124 mph (200 km/h)
H 130 mph (210 km/h)
V 149 mph (240 km/h)
W 168 mph (270 km/h)
Y 186 mph (299 km/h)
Note: For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph (240
km/h), tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR. For those with
a maximum speed capability over 186 mph (299 km/h), tire
manufacturers always use the letters ZR.
8. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN): This begins with the
letters “DOT” and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. The
next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was
manufactured, the next two are the tire size code and the last four
numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example,
the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After 2000 the numbers
go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th week of 2001. The
numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability. This
information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall.
9. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
10. Tire Ply Composition and Material Used: Indicates the number of
plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and
sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the
tire and the sidewall, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
11. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the tire. Refer to the tire label or the
safety certification label, which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of
the driver’s door, for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
181
12. Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades
• Treadwear: The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (1
1
⁄
2
) times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
• Traction: The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B,
and C. The grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement
as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
• Temperature: The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
13. Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure: Indicates the tire
manufacturers’ maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at
which the maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is
normally higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation
pressure which can be found on either the tire label or certification label
which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. The cold
inflation pressure should never be set lower than the recommended
pressure on the vehicle label.
The tire suppliers may have additional markings, notes or warnings such
as standard load, radial tubeless, etc.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
182
Additional information contained on the tire sidewall for “LT” type
tires
“LT” type tires have some additional
information beyond those of “P”
type tires; these differences are
described below:
1. LT: Indicates a tire, designated by
the Tire and Rim Association
(T&RA), that is intended for service
on light trucks.
2. Load Range/Load Inflation
Limits: Indicates the tire’s
load-carrying capabilities and its
inflation limits.
3. Maximum Load Dual lb. (kg)
at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure
when the tire is used as a dual; defined as four tires on the rear axle (a
total of six or more tires on the vehicle).
4. Maximum Load Single lb. (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single;
defined as two tires (total) on the rear axle.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
183
Information on “T” type tires
“T” type tires have some additional
information beyond those of “P”
type tires; these differences are
described below:
T145/80D16 is an example of a tire
size.
Note: The temporary tire size for
your vehicle may be different from
this example.
1. T: Indicates a type of tire,
designated by the Tire and Rim
Association (T&RA), that is
intended for temporary service on
cars, SUVs, minivans and light
trucks.
2. 145: Indicates the nominal width
of the tire in millimeters from
sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the
wider the tire.
3. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width. Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall.
4. D: Indicates a “diagonal” type tire.
R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.
5. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
Location of the tire label
You will find a tire label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size and
other important information located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver’s door. Refer to the payload description and graphic in the Vehicle
loading — with and without a trailer section.
TIRE CARE
Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can also cause tires to wear
abnormally. Here are some of the important maintenance items:
Tire wear
Measure and inspect the tire tread on all your tires periodically.
Advanced and unusual tire wear can reduce the ability of tread to grip
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
184
the road in adverse (wet, snowy, etc.) conditions. Visually check your
tires for uneven wear, looking for high and low areas or unusually
smooth areas. Also check for signs of tire damage.
When the tread is worn down to
1/16th of an inch (2 mm), tires must
be replaced to prevent your vehicle
from skidding and hydroplaning.
Built-in treadwear indicators, or
“wear bars”, which look like narrow
strips of smooth rubber across the
tread will appear on the tire when
the tread is worn down to 1/16th of
an inch (2 mm). When the tire tread
wears down to the same height as
these “wear bars”, the tire is worn
out and should be replaced.
Inspect your tires frequently for any
of the following conditions and
replace them if one or more of the
following conditions exist:
• Fabric showing through the tire
rubber
• Bulges in the tread or sidewalls
• Cracks or cuts on the sidewalls
• Cracks in the tread groove
• Impact damage resulting from use
• Separation in the tread
• Separation in the sidewall
• Severe abrasion on the sidewall
If your vehicle has a leak in the exhaust system, a road tire or the spare
tire may be exposed to hot exhaust temperatures requiring the tire to be
replaced.
Safety practices
Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety.
• Observe posted speed limits
• Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
185
• Avoid potholes and objects on the road
• Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking
If your vehicle is stuck in snow, mud, sand, etc., do not rapidly
spin the tires; spinning the tires can tear the tire and cause an
explosion. A tire can explode in as little as three to five seconds.
Never spin the tires in excess of the 35 mph (55 km/h) point
indicated on the speedometer.
Highway hazards
No matter how carefully you drive there’s always the possibility that you
may eventually have a flat tire on the highway. Drive slowly to the
closest safe area out of traffic. This may further damage the flat tire, but
your safety is more important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving, or you
suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged, immediately reduce your
speed. Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road. Stop and
inspect the tires for damage. If a tire is under-inflated or damaged,
deflate it, remove wheel and replace it with your spare tire and wheel. If
you cannot detect a cause, have the vehicle towed to the nearest repair
facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected.
Tire and wheel alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your
vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires. If your
vehicle seems to pull to one side when you’re driving, the wheels may be
out of alignment. Have a qualified technician at a Ford or
Lincoln/Mercury dealer check the wheel alignment periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid
treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by a qualified technician
at a Ford or Lincoln/Mercury dealer. Front wheel drive (FWD) vehicles
and those with an independent rear suspension (if equipped) may
require alignment of all four wheels.
The tires should also be balanced periodically. An unbalanced tire and
wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
186
Tire rotation
Rotating your tires at the recommended interval (as indicated in the
Scheduled Maintenance Guide that comes with your vehicle) will help
your tires wear more evenly, providing better tire performance and
longer tire life. Unless otherwise specified, rotate the tires approximately
every 5,000 miles (8,000 km).
• Front Wheel Drive (FWD)
vehicles (front tires at top of
diagram)
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
187
• Rear Wheel Drive (RWD)
vehicles/Four Wheel Drive
(4WD)/ All Wheel Drive (AWD)
vehicles (front tires at top of
diagram)
Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires.
Note: If your tires show uneven wear ask a qualified technician at a Ford or
Lincoln/Mercury dealership to check for and correct any wheel misalignment,
tire imbalance or mechanical problem involved before tire rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire/wheel. A
dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that is
different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels. If
you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel it is intended for temporary use
only and should not be used in a tire rotation.
Note: After having your tires rotated, inflation pressure must be checked
and adjusted to the vehicle requirements.
USING SNOW TIRES AND TRACTION DEVICES
Snow tires must be the same size and grade as the tires you
currently have on your vehicle.
The tires on your vehicle have all-weather treads to provide traction in
rain and snow. However, in some climates, using snow tires or traction
devices may be necessary.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
188
Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and traction devices:
• SAE class “S” cables should ONLY be used on the front axle for
P235/70R16 tires. With P225/75R15 and P215/70R16 tires, SAE class
“S” cables can be used on both the front and rear wheels.
• Install cables or chains securely, verifying that the cables or chains do
not touch any wiring, brake lines or fuel lines.
• Drive cautiously. If you hear the cables or chains rub or bang against
the vehicle, stop and retighten them. If this does not work, remove the
cables or chains to prevent vehicle damage.
• Avoid overloading your vehicle.
• Remove the cables or chains when they are no longer needed.
• Do not use cables or chains on dry roads.
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h) with tire cables or chains on your
vehicle.
Consult your dealer for information on other Ford approved methods of
traction control.
VEHICLE LOADING – WITH AND WITHOUT A TRAILER
This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle and/or
trailer, to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating
capability, with or without a trailer. Properly loading your vehicle will
provide maximum return of vehicle design performance. Before loading
your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining
your vehicle’s weight ratings, with or without a trailer, from the vehicle’s
Safety Certification Label and Tire Label:
Base Curb Weight – is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of
fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or
optional equipment.
Vehicle Curb Weight – is the weight of your new vehicle when you
picked it up from your dealer plus any aftermarket equipment.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
189
Payload – is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that the
vehicle is carrying. The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found
on the Tire Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. Look
for “THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND CARGO
SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR XXX lb.” for maximum
payload. The payload listed on the tire label is the maximum payload for
the vehicle as built by the assembly plant. If any aftermarket or dealer
installed equipment has been installed on the vehicle, the weight of the
equipment must be subtracted from the payload listed on the tire label
in order to determine the new payload.
The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle can be limited
either by volume capacity (how much space is available) or by
payload capacity (how much weight the vehicle should carry). Once
you have reached the maximum payload of your vehicle, do not add
more cargo, even if there is space available. Overloading or improperly
loading your vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle control and
vehicle rollover.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
190
Cargo Weight – includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight,
including cargo and optional equipment. When towing, trailer tongue load
or king pin weight is also part of cargo weight.
GAW (Gross Axle Weight) – is the total weight placed on each axle
(front and rear) – including vehicle curb weight and all payload.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
191
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These
numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label
located on the driver’s door or B-Pillar. The total load on each
axle must never exceed its GAWR.
Exceeding the Safety Certification Label axle weight rating limits
could result in substandard vehicle handling or performance,
engine, transmission and/or structural damage, serious damage to the
vehicle, loss of control and personal injury.
Note: For trailer towing information refer to Trailer towing found in
this chapter or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your
dealership.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) – is the Vehicle Curb Weight + cargo +
passengers.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
192
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating) – is the maximum
allowable weight of the fully loaded
vehicle (including all options,
equipment, passengers and cargo).
The GVWR is shown on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label located on the driver’s
door or B-Pillar. The GVW must
never exceed the GVWR.
Exceeding the Safety Certification Label vehicle weight rating
limits could result in substandard vehicle handling or
performance, engine, transmission and/or structural damage, serious
damage to the vehicle, loss of control and personal injury.
GCW (Gross Combined Weight) – is the weight of the loaded vehicle
(GVW) plus the weight of the fully loaded trailer.
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer – including all cargo and
passengers – that the vehicle can handle without risking damage.
(Important: The towing vehicle’s braking system is rated for operation at
GVWR, not at GCWR. Separate functional brakes should be used for safe
control of towed vehicles and for trailers where the GCW of the towing
vehicle plus the trailer exceed the GVWR of the towing vehicle. The
GCW must never exceed the GCWR.
Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight – is the highest possible weight of a
fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow. It assumes a vehicle with only
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
193
mandatory options, no cargo (internal or external), a tongue load of
10–15% (conventional trailer) or king pin weight of 15–25% (fifth wheel
trailer), and driver only (150 lb. [68 kg]). Consult your dealership (or
the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your dealership) for
more detailed information.
Tongue Load or Fifth Wheel King Pin Weight – refers to the amount
of the weight that a trailer pushes down on a trailer hitch.
Examples: For a 5,000 lb. (2,268 kg) conventional trailer, multiply 5,000
by 0.10 and 0.15 to obtain a proper tongue load range of 500 to 750 lb.
(227 to 340 kg). For an 11,500 lb. (5,216 kg) fifth wheel trailer, multiply
by 0.15 and 0.25 to obtain a proper king pin load range of 1,725 to 2,875
lb. (782 to 1,304 kg)
Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the
certification label.
Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities
than the originals because they may lower the vehicle’s GVWR
and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires with a higher limit than the
originals do not increase the GVWR and GAWR limitations.
Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could result in
serious damage to the vehicle and/or personal injury.
Steps for determining the correct load limit:
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX pounds” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX
kilograms or XXX pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lb. and
there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lb. (1400 – 750 (5 x
150) = 650 lb.).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
194
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
The following gives you a few examples on how to calculate the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity:
• An example for your vehicle with 1400 pounds of cargo and luggage
capacity. You decide to go golfing. You and your friends average 220
pounds each and the golf bags weigh approximately 30 pounds each.
Is there enough load capacity to carry you, 4 of your friends and all
the golf bags? The calculation would be: 1400 – (5 x 220) – (5 x 30) =
1400 – 1100 – 150 = 150 pounds; yes, you have enough load capacity
in your vehicle to transport 4 of your friends and golf bags.
• Another example for your vehicle with 1400 pounds of cargo and
luggage capacity. You and one of your friends decide to pick up
cement from the local home improvement store to finish that patio
you have been planning for the past 2 years. Measuring the inside of
the vehicle with the rear seat folded down, you have room for 12-100
pound bags of cement. Do you have enough load capacity to transport
the cement to your home? If you and your friend each weighed 220
pounds, the calculation would be: 1400 – (2 x 220) – (12 x 100) =
1400 – 440 – 1200 = – 40 pounds; no, you do not have enough cargo
capacity to carry that much weight. You will need to reduce the load
weight by at least 240 pounds. If you remove 3-100 pound cement
bags, then the load calculation would be:
1400 – (2 x 220) – (9 x 100) = 1400 – 440 – 900 = 60 pounds; now you
have the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home.
The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your
vehicle in a manner that does not overload the Front or the Rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating specified for your vehicle on the Certification label
found on the driver’s door.
Special loading instructions for owners of pickup trucks and
utility-type vehicles
For important information regarding safe operation of this type
of vehicle, see the Preparing to drive your vehicle section in
this chapter.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
195
Loaded vehicles may handle differently than unloaded vehicles.
Extra precautions, such as slower speeds and increased stopping
distance, should be taken when driving a heavily loaded vehicle.
Your vehicle can haul more cargo and people than most passenger cars.
Depending upon the type and placement of the load, hauling cargo and
people may raise the center of gravity of the vehicle.
Calculating the load your vehicle can carry/tow
1. Use the appropriate maximum GCWR chart (in the Trailer towing
section in this chapter) for your type of engine and rear axle ratio.
2. Weigh your vehicle without cargo. To obtain correct weights, take your
vehicle to a shipping company or an inspection station for trucks.
3. Subtract your loaded weight from the maximum GCWR in the chart.
This is the maximum trailer weight your vehicle can tow. It must be
below the maximum trailer weight shown in the chart.
TRAILER TOWING
Trailer towing with your vehicle may require the use of a trailer tow
option package.
Trailer towing puts additional loads on your vehicle’s engine, transaxle,
axle, brakes, tires, and suspension. For your safety and to maximize
vehicle performance, be sure to use the proper equipment while towing.
Follow these guidelines to ensure safe towing procedure:
• Stay within your vehicle’s load limits.
• Thoroughly prepare your vehicle for towing. Refer to Preparing to
tow in this chapter.
• Use extra caution when driving while trailer towing. Refer to Driving
while you tow in this chapter.
• Service your vehicle more frequently if you tow a trailer. Refer to the
severe duty schedule in the scheduled maintenance guide.
• Do not tow a trailer until your vehicle has been driven at least 800 km
(500 miles).
• Refer to the instructions included with towing accessories for the
proper installation and adjustment specifications.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
196
Do not exceed the maximum loads listed on the Certification label. For
load specification terms found on the label, refer to Vehicle loading in
this chapter. Remember to figure in the tongue load of your loaded
trailer when figuring the total weight.
FWD
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating)/Trailer Weights
Engine Maximum GCWR - lb.
(kg)
Trailer Weight Range
- lb. (kg)
2.3L 4860 (2204) 1500 (680)
Notes: For high altitude operation, reduce GCW by 2% per 1000 ft. (300
meters) elevation. For definitions of terms and instructions on calculating
your vehicle’s load, refer to Vehicle loading in this chapter. Maximum
trailer weights shown. The combined weight of the completed towing
vehicle and the loaded trailer must not exceed the GCWR.
The Escape is capable of pulling the maximum trailer weight(s) as
specified above. Certain states require electric trailer brakes for trailers
over a specified weight. The Escape vehicle electrical system is not
equipped to accommodate electric trailer brakes.
4WD
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating)/Trailer Weights
Engine Maximum GCWR - lb.
(kg)
Trailer Weight Range
- lb. (kg)
2.3L 4980 (2259) 1000 (454)
Notes: For high altitude operation, reduce GCW by 2% per 1000 ft. (300
meters) elevation. For definitions of terms and instructions on calculating
your vehicle’s load, refer to Vehicle loading in this chapter. Maximum
trailer weights shown. The combined weight of the completed towing
vehicle and the loaded trailer must not exceed the GCWR.
The Escape is capable of pulling the maximum trailer weight(s) as
specified above. Certain states require electric trailer brakes for trailers
over a specified weight. The Escape vehicle electrical system is not
equipped to accommodate electric trailer brakes.
Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the
certification label.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
197
Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended gross trailer
weight exceeds the limit of the vehicle and could result in
engine damage, transmission damage, structural damage, loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover and personal injury.
Preparing to tow
Use the proper equipment for towing a trailer and make sure it is
properly attached to your vehicle. See your dealer or a reliable trailer
dealer if you require assistance.
Hitches
Do not use hitches that clamp onto the vehicle bumper. Use a load
carrying hitch. You must distribute the load in your trailer so that
10–15% of the total weight of the trailer is on the tongue.
Safety chains
Always connect the trailer’s safety chains to hook retainers on the
vehicle. To connect the trailer’s safety chains, cross the chains under the
trailer tongue and allow slack for turning corners.
If you use a rental trailer, follow the instructions that the rental agency
gives to you.
Do not attach safety chains to the bumper.
Trailer brakes
Electric, manual, automatic or surge-type brakes, if compatible with the
vehicle, are safe if installed properly and adjusted to the manufacturer’s
specifications. The trailer brakes must meet local and Federal
regulations.
Do not connect a trailer’s hydraulic brake system directly to your
vehicle’s brake system. Your vehicle may not have enough
braking power and your chances of having a collision greatly increase.
The braking system of the tow vehicle is rated for operation at the
GVWR not GCWR.
Trailer lamps
Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles. Make sure all running
lights, brake lights, turn signals and hazard lights are working. See your
dealer or trailer rental agency for proper instructions and equipment for
hooking up trailer lamps.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
198
Driving while you tow
When towing a trailer:
• Turn off the speed control. The speed control may shut off
automatically when you are towing on long, steep grades.
• Consult your local motor vehicle speed regulations for towing a trailer.
• Anticipate stops and brake gradually.
• Do not exceed the GCWR rating or transmission damage may occur.
Servicing after towing
If you tow a trailer for long distances, your vehicle will require more
frequent service intervals. Refer to your Scheduled Maintenance Guide
for more information.
Trailer towing tips
• Practice turning, stopping and backing up before starting on a trip to
get the feel of the vehicle trailer combination. When turning, make
wider turns so the trailer wheels will clear curbs and other obstacles.
• Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached.
• If you are driving down a long or steep hill, shift to a lower gear. Do
not apply the brakes continuously, as they may overheat and become
less effective.
• The trailer tongue weight should be 10–15% of the loaded trailer
weight.
• After you have traveled 50 miles (80 km), thoroughly check your
hitch, electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. If you must
park on a grade, place wheel chocks under the trailer’s wheels.
Launching or retrieving a boat
Disconnect the wiring to the trailer before backing the trailer
into the water. Reconnect the wiring to the trailer after the
trailer is removed from the water.
When backing down a ramp during boat launching or retrieval:
• do not allow the static water level to rise above the bottom edge of
the rear bumper.
• do not allow waves to break higher than 6 inches (15 cm) above the
bottom edge of the rear bumper.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
199
Exceeding these limits may allow water to enter vehicle components:
• causing internal damage to the components.
• affecting driveability, emissions and reliability.
Replace the rear axle lubricant any time the axle has been submerged in
water. Rear axle lubricant quantities are not to be checked or changed
unless a leak is suspected or repair required.
RECREATIONAL TOWING
An example of “recreational towing” is towing your vehicle behind a
motorhome.
On Front Wheel Drive (FWD) vehicles, “recreational towing” is permitted
by trailering the vehicle with its front wheels on a dolly. This protects
the transmission’s internal mechanical components from potential lack of
lubrication damage.
On Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) vehicles, “recreational towing” is permitted
only if the vehicle is trailered with all four (4) wheels off the ground.
Otherwise, no “recreational towing” is permitted.
For other towing requirements, refer to Wrecker towing in the Roadside
Emergencies chapter.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
200
STARTING
Positions of the ignition
1. LOCK, locks the gearshift lever
and allows key removal.
2. ACCESSORY, allows the electrical
accessories such as the radio to
operate while the vehicle is not
running.
3. RUN, all electrical circuits
operational and warning lights will
illuminate. This is the position the
key is in when you’re driving.
4. START, starts the engine, vehicle and electrical power systems.
Preparing to start your vehicle
Engine starting is controlled by the electronically-controlled
Continuously Variable Transaxle (eCVT). For more information on
starting the vehicle, refer to Starting the engine in this chapter.
Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce very high
temperatures in the engine and exhaust system, creating the risk
of fire or other damage.
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry
ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine
compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in other enclosed
areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open the garage door
before you start the engine. See Guarding against exhaust fumes in
this chapter for more instructions.
If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealer
inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell
exhaust fumes.
Important safety precautions
When the engine starts, the idle RPM runs faster to warm the engine. If
the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically, have the vehicle
checked.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driving
Driving
201
Before starting the vehicle:
1. Make sure all occupants buckle their safety belts. For more
information on safety belts and their proper usage, refer to the Seating
and Safety Restraints chapter.
2. Make sure the headlamps and electrical accessories are off.
3. Make sure the parking brake is
set.
4. Make sure the gearshift is in P
(Park).
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driving
202
5. Turn the key to 3 (RUN) without
turning the key to 4 (START).
Make sure the corresponding lights on the instrument panel cluster
illuminate or illuminate briefly. If a light fails to illuminate, have the
vehicle serviced.
• If the driver’s safety belt is fastened, the
light may not illuminate.
Starting the vehicle
1. Turn the key to 3 (RUN) without
turning the key to 4 (START). If
there is difficulty in turning the key,
rotate the steering wheel until the
key turns freely. This condition may
occur when:
• the front wheels are turned
• a front wheel is against the curb
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driving
203
Turn the key to 4 (START), then
release the key as soon as the
vehicle starts. After the vehicle has
been started, a vehicle outlined and
illuminated in green (also called the Ready Indicator Light) will light in
the instrument cluster to indicate the vehicle is on. This indicator will
remain illuminated while the vehicle is on, whether the engine is running
or not, to indicate the vehicle is capable of movement (using its electric
motor, engine, or both).
Note: After starting the vehicle, the engine may stop running to
conserve fuel after it is warmed-up and the high voltage battery is
sufficiently charged.
Note: If the vehicle does not start, put the gearshift lever into P (Park),
turn the ignition off, then attempt to start the vehicle again. If the
vehicle still does not start, it may require refueling, jump starting,
resetting of the fuel pump/high voltage shut-off switches or service. For
information on jump starting the vehicle and resetting the fuel
pump/high voltage shut-off switches, refer to Jump starting the high
voltage battery and Fuel pump/High voltage shut-off switches both
found in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.
Using the engine block/high voltage battery heater (if equipped)
An engine block/high voltage battery heater warms the engine coolant
and high voltage battery cells which aids in starting, vehicle performance
and heater/defroster performance in cold weather. Use of an engine
block/high voltage battery heater is strongly recommended if you live in
a region where temperatures reach -10°F (-23°C) or below. For best
results, plug the heater in at least three hours before starting the vehicle.
The heater can be plugged in the night before starting the vehicle.
To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not use your heater
with ungrounded electrical systems or two-pronged (cheater)
adapters.
Guarding against exhaust fumes
Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes. Take precautions to avoid
its dangerous effects.
If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealer
inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell
exhaust fumes.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driving
204
Important ventilating information
If the engine is idling while the vehicle is stopped for a long period of
time, open the windows at least one inch (2.5 cm) or adjust the heating
or air conditioning to bring in fresh air.
BRAKES
Occasional brake noise is normal. If a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding
or continuous squeal sound is present, the brake linings may be worn-out
and should be inspected by a qualified service technician. If the vehicle
has continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking,
the vehicle should be inspected by a qualified service technician.
Refer to Brake system warning
light in the Instrument Cluster
chapter for information on the brake
system warning light.
Under normal operating conditions, brake dust may accumulate on the
wheels. Some brake dust is inevitable as brakes wear and does not
contribute to brake noise. The use of modern friction materials with
emphasis on improved performance and environmental considerations
can lead to more dust than in the past. Brake dust can be cleaned by
weekly washing with soapy water and a soft sponge. Heavier deposits can
be removed with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37–A).
Four-wheel anti-lock brake system (ABS)
Your vehicle is equipped with an Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). This
system helps you maintain steering control during emergency stops by
keeping the brakes from locking. The hydraulic brake system used for
regenerative braking is different from other vehicles. The noise from the
ABS pump motor and the brake pedal pulsation are much less than on
vehicles with conventional ABS. Noise and pedal pulsation during ABS
may not be noticed.
The sliding car symbol in the
instrument cluster will be
illuminated during ABS braking.
The hydraulic brake system used for regenerative braking will charge its
hydraulic system at the beginning of a trip and discharge the system at
the end of each trip. You may notice a pumping sound when you enter
the vehicle or a venting sound a few minutes after parking the vehicle.
!
BRAKE
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driving
205
Using ABS
When hard braking is required, apply continuous force on the brake
pedal; do not pump the brake pedal since this will reduce the
effectiveness of the ABS and will increase your vehicle’s stopping
distance. The ABS will be activated immediately, allowing you to retain
full steering control during hard braking and on slippery surfaces.
However, the ABS does not decrease stopping distance.
ABS warning lamp
The ABS lamp in the instrument
cluster momentarily illuminates
when the ignition is turned on. If
the light does not illuminate during
start up, remains on or flashes, the
ABS may be disabled and may need to be serviced
Even when the ABS is disabled,
normal braking is still effective. (If
your BRAKE warning lamp
illuminates with the parking brake
released, have your brake system
serviced immediately.)
Regenerative Braking System (RBS)
Your Hybrid Electric Vehicle uses a feature known as regenerative
braking. This is used to simulate the engine braking of an internal
combustion engine and assist the standard brake system while recovering
some of the energy of motion back into the battery to improve fuel
economy. The standard brake system is designed to fully stop the car if
regenerative braking is not available. During regenerative braking, the
motor is spun as a generator to create electrical current. This recharges
the high voltage battery and slows the vehicle. In effect, once the
accelerator pedal is released, the motor changes from an energy user to
an energy producer.
When the accelerator pedal is released or the brake pedal is applied, the
brake controller automatically detects the amount of deceleration
requested and optimizes how much of the deceleration will be produced
by regenerative braking. The remaining portion is generated by standard
friction braking. When the battery is almost fully charged, the amount of
regenerative braking is limited to avoid overcharging, and the requested
deceleration is produced by standard friction braking alone.
Regenerative braking does not take the place of the standard friction
brakes; it only assists them. Regenerative braking has also been designed
ABS
!
BRAKE
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driving
206
to interact with the anti-lock brake system (ABS). Regenerative braking
is disabled when the ABS is activated or the battery is fully charged.
Parking brake
To set the parking brake, pull the
handle up as far as possible. The
BRAKE warning lamp will illuminate
and will remain illuminated until the
parking brake is released.
To release, press and hold the
button, pull the handle up slightly,
then push the handle down.
Always set the parking
brake fully and make sure
that the gearshift is securely
latched in P (Park).
STEERING
Your vehicle is equipped with an Electric Power-Assisted Steering
(EPAS) system. There is no fluid reservoir to check or fill.
If your vehicle loses electrical power while you are driving (or if the
ignition is turned off), you can steer the vehicle manually, but it takes
more effort. Under extreme usage conditions, the steering effort may
increase. This occurs to prevent overheating and permanent damage to
your steering system. If this should occur, you will neither lose the ability
to steer the vehicle manually nor will it cause permanent damage. When
you can safely pull your vehicle off to the side of the road, the vehicle
should be turned off until it is able to cool.
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
• an improperly inflated tire
• uneven tire wear
• loose or worn suspension components
• loose or worn steering components
• improper steering alignment
A high crown in the road or high crosswinds may also make the steering
seem to wander/pull.
!
BRAKE
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driving
207
PREPARING TO DRIVE YOUR VEHICLE
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than
other types of vehicles.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely
to die than a person wearing a safety belt.
Your vehicle has larger tires and increased ground clearance, giving the
vehicle a higher center of gravity than a passenger car.
Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and
four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a
lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles are not
designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more
than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under
off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt
maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in
an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
Loaded vehicles, with a higher center of gravity, may handle
differently than unloaded vehicles. Extra precautions such as
slower speeds and increased stopping distance should be taken when
driving a heavily loaded vehicle.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION
Brake-shift interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift interlock feature that prevents
the gearshift lever from being moved from P (Park) when the ignition is
in the RUN position unless brake pedal is depressed.
If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P (Park) with ignition in
the RUN position and the brake pedal depressed, it is possible that a
fuse has blown or the vehicle’s brakelamps are not operating properly.
Refer to Fuses and relays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.
If the fuse is not blown, perform the following procedure:
1. Apply the parking brake.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driving
208
2. Using a screwdriver or similar
tool, carefully pry out the small,
round, tethered Brake Transmission
Shift Interlock (BTSI) cover cap
located to the right of the gearshift
lever.
3. Depress the brake pedal and then start the vehicle.
4. Insert a screwdriver or similar
tool straight down into the access
hole and press downward while
pulling the gearshift lever out of the
P (Park) position and into the N
(Neutral) position.
5. Remove tool and reinstall BTSI tethered cover cap.
6. Release the parking brake and drive normally.
Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the brakelamps
are working.
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is
latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and
remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lamp
remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working properly.
See your dealer or a qualified service technician as soon as possible.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driving
209
Understanding the gearshift positions of the
electronically-controlled Continuously Variable Transaxle (eCVT)
P (Park)
This position locks the transaxle and prevents the front wheels from
turning.
To put your vehicle in gear:
• Start the engine
• Depress the brake pedal
• Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear
To put your vehicle in P (Park):
• Come to a complete stop
• Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P (Park)
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is
latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and
remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driving
210
R (Reverse)
With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), the vehicle will move backward.
Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R
(Reverse).
N (Neutral)
With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the vehicle is free to roll; hold
the brake pedal down while in this position. Because of the unique
nature of the hybrid vehicle, the engine will not start in the N (Neutral)
position.
The vehicle does not charge the high voltage battery in the N (Neutral)
position. Do not idle the vehicle in N (Neutral) for extended periods as
this will discharge your high voltage battery.
D (Drive)
The normal driving position for the best fuel economy.
L (Low)
• Provides maximum engine braking.
• The transmission may be shifted into L (Low) at any vehicle speed.
When parking, do not use the gearshift in place of the parking
brake. Always set the parking brake fully and make sure that the
gearshift is securely latched in Park (P). Turn off the ignition
whenever you leave your vehicle. Never leave your vehicle unattended
while it is running. If you do not take these precautions, your vehicle
may move unexpectedly and injure someone.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow, it may be rocked out by
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts in a
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the
transmission and tires may occur, or the engine may overheat.
FOUR WHEEL DRIVE (4WD) SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
For important information regarding safe operation of this type
of vehicle, see Preparing to drive your vehicle in this chapter.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driving
211
Your vehicle is equipped with an intelligent 4WD System that
continuously monitors vehicle conditions and automatically adjusts the
power distribution between the front and rear wheels. It combines
transparent all-surface operation with highly capable four-wheel drive.
The 4WD system is always active and requires no driver input. It is
capable of handling all road conditions, including street and highway
driving as well as off-road and winter driving.
During very extreme off-road events, the 4WD system has a heat
protection mode to protect itself from damage. If the system detects an
overheat condition, it will enter a locked mode. If the heat in the 4WD
system continues to rise in locked mode, it will disable itself. To exit heat
protection mode, simply stop the vehicle and allow it to cool.
4WD system messages in Message Center
• SERVICE 4WD: Displayed when the 4WD system is not operating
properly. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact
your dealer as soon as possible.
• 4WD LOCKED TEMPORARILY: Displayed when 4WD system is
temporarily locked.
• 4WD DISABLED TEMPORARILY: Displayed when 4WD system is
temporarily disabled.
• 4WD AUTO RESTORED: Displayed when the 4WD system function
is restored to normal operation.
Driving off-road with truck and utility vehicles
4WD vehicles are specially equipped for driving on sand, snow, mud and
rough terrain and have operating characteristics that are somewhat
different from conventional vehicles, both on and off the road.
How your vehicle differs from other vehicles
Truck and utility vehicles can differ from some other vehicles. Your
vehicle may be higher to allow it to travel over rough terrain without
getting hung up or damaging underbody components.
The differences that make your vehicle so versatile also make it handle
differently than an ordinary passenger car.
Maintain steering wheel control at all times, especially in rough terrain.
Since sudden changes in terrain can result in abrupt steering wheel
motion, make sure you grip the steering wheel from the outside. Do not
grip the spokes.
Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage from concealed objects such as
rocks and stumps.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driving
212
You should either know the terrain or examine maps of the area before
driving. Map out your route before driving in the area. To maintain
steering and braking control of your vehicle, you must have all four
wheels on the ground and they must be rolling, not sliding or spinning.
Basic operating principles
• Drive slower in strong crosswinds which can affect the normal steering
characteristics of your vehicle.
• Be extremely careful when driving on pavement made slippery by
loose sand, water, gravel, snow or ice.
If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement
• If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement, slow down, but
avoid severe brake application, and ease the vehicle back onto the
pavement only after reducing your speed. Do not turn the steering
wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface.
• It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow
down gradually before returning to the pavement. You may lose
control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too
sharply or abruptly.
• It often may be less risky to strike small objects, such as highway
reflectors, with minor damage to your vehicle rather than attempt a
sudden return to the pavement which could cause the vehicle to slide
sideways out of control or roll over. Remember, your safety and the
safety of others should be your primary concern.
Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and
four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a
lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles are not
designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more
than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under
off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt
maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in
an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
If your vehicle gets stuck
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts, in a
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driving
213
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes or damage
to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may
overheat.
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is
latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and
remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lamp
remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working properly.
See your dealer or a qualified service technician.
Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h). The tires may
fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
Emergency maneuvers
• In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn
must be made, remember to avoid “over-driving” your vehicle, i.e.,
turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid
the emergency. Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control,
not more. Additionally, smooth variations of the accelerator and/or
brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are
required. Avoid abrupt steering, acceleration or braking which could
result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover
and/or personal injury. Use all available road surface to return the
vehicle to a safe direction of travel.
• In the event of an emergency stop, avoid skidding the tires and do not
attempt any sharp steering wheel movements.
Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and
four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a
lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles are not
designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more
than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under
off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt
maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in
an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driving
214
• If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another (i.e., from
concrete to gravel) there will be a change in the way the vehicle
responds to a maneuver (steering, acceleration or braking). Again,
avoid these abrupt inputs.
Sand
When driving over sand, try to keep all four wheels on the most solid
area of the trail. Avoid reducing the tire pressures and drive steadily
through the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly and avoid spinning the
wheels.
If you must reduce the tire pressure for whatever reason in sand, make
sure you re-inflate the tires as soon as possible.
Avoid excessive speed because vehicle momentum can work against you
and cause the vehicle to become stuck to the point that assistance may
be required from another vehicle. Remember, you may be able to back
out the way you came if you proceed with caution.
Mud and water
If you must drive through high
water, drive slowly. Traction or
brake capability may be limited.
When driving through water,
determine the depth; avoid water
higher than the bottom of the hubs
(if possible) and proceed slowly. If
the ignition system gets wet, the vehicle may stall.
Once through water, always try the brakes. Wet brakes do not stop the
vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by moving
your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.
Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle speed or direction when you
are driving in mud. Even 4WD vehicles can lose traction in slick mud. As
when you are driving over sand, apply the accelerator slowly and avoid
spinning your wheels. If the vehicle does slide, steer in the direction of
the slide until you regain control of the vehicle.
If the transmission, transfer case or front axle are submerged in water,
their fluids should be checked and changed, if necessary.
Driving through deep water may damage the transmission.
If the front or rear axle is submerged in water, the axle lubricant should
be replaced.
After driving through mud, clean off residue stuck to rotating driveshafts
and tires. Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts causes an
imbalance that could damage drive components.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driving
215
“Tread Lightly” is an educational
program designed to increase public
awareness of land-use regulations
and responsibilities in our nation’s
wilderness areas. Ford Motor
Company joins the U.S. Forest Service and the Bureau of Land
Management in encouraging you to help preserve our national forest and
other public and private lands by “treading lightly.”
Driving on hilly or sloping terrain
Although natural obstacles may make it necessary to travel diagonally up
or down a hill or steep incline, you should always try to drive straight up
or straight down. Avoid driving crosswise or turning on steep
slopes or hills. A danger lies in losing traction, slipping sideways and
possibly rolling over. Whenever driving on a hill, determine beforehand
the route you will use. Do not drive over the crest of a hill without
seeing what conditions are on the other side. Do not drive in reverse
over a hill without the aid of an observer.
If you do stall out, do not try to
turn around because you might roll
over. It is better to back down to a
safe location.
Apply just enough power to the
wheels to climb the hill. Too much
power will cause the tires to slip,
spin or lose traction, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
Do not descend a hill in N (Neutral)
and avoid sudden hard braking as
you could lose control.
Since your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, apply the brakes steadily. Do not
“pump” the brakes.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driving
216
Driving on snow and ice
4WD vehicles have advantages over 2WD vehicles in snow and ice but
can skid like any other vehicle.
Should you start to slide while driving on snowy or icy roads, turn the
steering wheel in the direction of the slide until you regain control.
Avoid sudden applications of power and quick changes of direction on
snow and ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily when starting
from a full stop.
Avoid sudden braking as well. Although a 4WD vehicle may accelerate
better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice, it won’t stop any
faster, because as in other vehicles, braking occurs at all four wheels. Do
not become overconfident as to road conditions.
Make sure you allow sufficient distance between you and other vehicles
for stopping; drive slower than usual. Since your vehicle is equipped with
a Four Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), apply the brake steadily.
Do not “pump” the brakes. Refer to the Brakes section of this chapter
for additional information on the operation of the anti-lock brake system.
4WD vehicles should be driven with traction devices as referred to in
Using snow tires and traction devices in the Tires, Wheels and
Loading chapter.
Maintenance and Modifications
The suspension and steering systems on your vehicle have been designed
and tested to provide durable load carrying capability and predictable
performance whether loaded or empty. For this reason, Ford Motor
Company strongly recommends that you do not make modifications such
as adding or removing parts (such as lift kits or stabilizer bars) or using
replacement parts not equivalent to the original factory equipment.
Any modifications to a vehicle that raise the center of gravity can make
it more likely the vehicle will roll over as a result of a loss of control.
Ford Motor Company recommends that caution be used with any vehicle
equipped with a high load or device (such as ladder racks or pickup box
cover).
Failure to maintain your vehicle properly may void the warranty, increase
your repair cost, reduce vehicle performance and operational capabilities
and adversely affect driver and passenger safety. Frequent inspection of
vehicle chassis components is recommended if the vehicle is subjected to
heavy off-road usage.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driving
217
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
If driving through deep or standing water is unavoidable, proceed very
slowly especially if the depth is not known. Never drive through water
that is higher than the bottom of the hubs (for trucks) or the bottom of
the wheel rims (for cars). Traction or brake capability may be limited
and your vehicle may stall. Water may also enter your engine’s air intake
and severely damage your engine.
Once through the water, always dry the brakes by moving your vehicle
slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal. Wet brakes do
not stop the vehicle as quickly as dry brakes. Driving through deep
water where the transaxle is submerged may allow water into the
transaxle and cause internal damage. Have the fluid checked and,
if water is found, replace the fluid.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driving
218
GETTING ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor
Company offers a complimentary roadside assistance program. This
program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The service
is available:
• 24–hours, seven days a week
• for the New Vehicle Limited Warranty period of three years or
36,000 miles (60,000 km), whichever occurs first on Ford and Mercury
vehicles, and four years or 50,000 miles (80,000 km) on Lincoln
vehicles.
Roadside assistance will cover:
• a flat tire change with a good spare (except Ford GT which has a tire
inflation kit)
• battery jump start
• lock-out assistance (key replacement cost is the customer’s
responsibility)
• fuel delivery (2.0 gallons [7.5L], maximum two occurrences within 12
month period)
• towing of your disabled vehicle to the nearest Ford Motor Company
dealership, or your selling dealer if within 35 miles (56.3 km) of the
nearest Ford Motor Company dealership (one tow per disablement).
Even non-warranty related tows, like accidents, are covered (some
exclusions apply, such as impound towing or repossession).
Canadian customers refer to your Owner Information Guide for
information on:
• coverage period
• exact fuel amounts
• towing of your disabled vehicle
• emergency travel expense reimbursement
• travel planning benefits
Using roadside assistance
Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. In the United States, this card is found in the
Owner Guide portfolio in the glove compartment. In Canada, the card is
found in the Owner Information Guide in the glove compartment.
U.S. Ford or Mercury vehicle customers who require roadside assistance,
call 1–800–241–3673; Lincoln vehicle customers call 1–800–521–4140.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Roadside Emergencies
219
Canadian customers who require roadside assistance, call
1–800–665–2006.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself, Ford Motor
Company will reimburse a reasonable amount. To obtain reimbursement
information, U.S. Ford or Mercury vehicles customers call
1-800-241-3673; Lincoln vehicle customers call 1–800–521–4140.
Canadian customers who need to obtain reimbursement information, call
1–800–665–2006.
Roadside coverage beyond basic warranty
In the United States, you may purchase additional roadside assistance
coverage beyond this period through the Ford Auto Club by contacting
your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealer.
Similarly in Canada, for uninterrupted Roadside Assistance coverage, you
may purchase extended coverage prior to your Basic Warranty’s Roadside
Assistance expiring. For more information and enrollment, contact
1–877–294–2582 or visit our website at www.ford.ca.
HAZARD FLASHER CONTROL
The hazard flasher is located on the
instrument panel by the radio. The
hazard flashers will operate when
the ignition is off.
Push in the flasher control and all
front and rear direction signals will
flash. Press the flasher control again
to turn them off. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a
safety hazard for other motorists.
Note: With extended use, the flasher may run down your battery.
FUEL PUMP/HIGH VOLTAGE SHUT-OFF SWITCHES
The fuel pump shut-off switch and high voltage shut-off switch stop the
electric fuel pump from sending fuel to the engine and shut off power
from the high voltage battery when your vehicle receives a substantial
physical jolt.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
220
After an accident, if the engine does not start, one or both of the
switches may have been activated.
The fuel pump shut-off switch is
located in the front passenger’s
footwell, behind a flip-up cover.
The high voltage shut-off switch is
located in the cargo area on the
passenger side of the vehicle in the
jack compartment, behind the jack
access door.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
221
To reset the switch(es):
1. Turn the ignition LOCK.
2. Check the fuel system for leaks.
3. If no leaks are apparent, reset the switch by pushing in on the reset
button. Both switches should be checked and reset.
4. Turn the ignition RUN.
5. Wait a few seconds and return the key to LOCK.
6. Make another check for leaks.
If you see or smell fuel, do not reset the fuel pump shut-off or try to
start your vehicle; you could injure yourself or others. Have all the
passengers get out of the vehicle and call the local fire department or a
towing service.
FUSES AND RELAYS
Fuses
If electrical components in the
vehicle are not working, a fuse may
have blown. Blown fuses are
identified by a broken wire within
the fuse. Check the appropriate
fuses before replacing any electrical
components.
Note: Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage
rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire
damage and could start a fire.
Standard fuse amperage rating and color
COLOR
Fuse
rating
Mini fuses
Standard
fuses
Maxi
fuses
Cartridge
maxi
fuses
Fuse link
cartridge
2A Grey Grey ———
3A Violet Violet ———
4A Pink Pink ———
5A Tan Tan ———
7.5A Brown Brown ———
15
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
222
COLOR
Fuse
rating
Mini fuses
Standard
fuses
Maxi
fuses
Cartridge
maxi
fuses
Fuse link
cartridge
10A Red Red ———
15A Blue Blue ———
20A Yellow Yellow Yellow Blue Blue
25A Natural Natural ———
30A Green Green Green Pink Pink
40A ——Orange Green Green
50A ——Red Red Red
60A ——Blue — Yellow
70A ——Tan — Brown
80A ——Natural — Black
Passenger compartment fuse panel
The fuse panel is located on the
right-hand side of the center
console, by the instrument panel.
Remove the panel cover to access
the fuses.
To remove a fuse use the fuse puller tool provided on the fuse panel
cover.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
223
The fuses are coded as follows:
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
Passenger Compartment Fuse
Panel Description
1 — Not used
2 5A* Spare
3 15A* Front and rear park lamps
4 10A* Ignition switch
5 2A* Powertrain Control Module (PCM
relay)
6 15A* Stop lamps
7 10A* Instrument cluster, Power mirror
switch, Radio
8 — Not used
9 30A** Power door locks
10 15A* Rear defroster switch indicator
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
224
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
Passenger Compartment Fuse
Panel Description
11 15A* Spare
12 5A* Radio
13 — Not used
14 — Not used
15 30A** Power windows
16 15A* Subwoofer
17 15A* Low beams
18 10A* 4x4
19 — Not used
20 15A* Horn
21 10A* Rear wiper motor, Rear wiper
washer
22 10A* Instrument cluster
23 5A* Spare
24 20A* Cigar lighter
25 20A* Front wiper motor, Front wiper
washer
26 5A* Climate control system mode
switch
27 5A* Traction (high voltage) Battery
Control Module (TBCM), Injectors
28 10A* Instrument cluster
29 10A* Back-up lamps
30 — Not used
31 — Not used
32 10A* Spare
33 15A* Air bag module
34 5A* Brake System Control Module
(BSCM), Power Steering Control
Module (PSCM)
35 5A* 4x4, Power point (110V AC)
* Mini fuse ** Cartridge fuse
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
225
Power distribution box
The power distribution box is located in the engine compartment. The
power distribution box contains high-current fuses that protect your
vehicle’s main electrical systems from overloads.
Always disconnect the low voltage (underhood) battery before
servicing high current fuses.
To reduce risk of electrical shock, always replace the cover to
the power distribution box before reconnecting the low voltage
(underhood) battery or refilling fluid reservoirs.
If the low voltage (underhood) battery has been disconnected and
reconnected, refer to the Low Voltage (Underhood) Battery section of
the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
The fuses are coded as follows.
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
Power Distribution Box
Description
1 5A* Brake module
2 10A* Climate control
3 5A* Transaxle Control Module (TCM)
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
226
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
Power Distribution Box
Description
4 7.5A* Traction (High voltage) Battery
Control Module (TBCM),
Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
5 5A* Interlock
6 15A* PCM power
7 15A* Heated Exhaust Gas Oxygen
(HEGO) sensors
8 10A* TCM VPWR
9 20A* Fuel pump
10 30A* Bussed power feed to PDB fuses
1, 2, 3, 4
11 20A* Fog lamps
12 25A* Exterior lighting
13 25A* B+ lighting
14 30A* Power point (110V AC)
15 20A* Ignition main
16 15A* A/C clutch
17 20A* Power point
18 30A* Injectors, COP (Coil-on-plug)
19 40A** Climate control blower
20 40A** Cooling fan #1
21 40A** PCM power
22 40A** SJB power (Passenger
conpartment fuse box) power #1
23 40A** SJB (Passenger compartment fuse
box) power #2
24 50A** BSCM #1
25 50A** Power Steering Control Module
(PSCM) #1
26 50A** TBCM (High voltage battery)
cooling fans and jump start
27 40A** Cooling fan #2
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
227
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
Power Distribution Box
Description
28 30A** Rear defroster
29 — Not used
30 40A** SJB (Passenger compartment fuse
box) power #3
31 50A** BSCM #2
32 50A** PSCM #2
001 Relay Power sustain for PCM, TBCM
and Transaxle Control Module
(TCM)
002 Relay PCM power
003 Relay Injector
004 Relay Auxiliary coolant pump
005 Relay Motor/Electronic coolant pump
006 Relay Fog lamps
007 Relay A/C clutch
Diode 01 — A/C clutch
Diode 02 — Not used
* Mini fuse **Cartridge fuse
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
228
Auxiliary relay box
The relay box is located on the radiator support (left of the hood latch).
Fuse/Relay Location Description
Relay 1 Driver side cooling fan
Relay 2 Passenger side cooling fan (low-speed)
Relay 3 Passenger side cooling fan (high-speed)
JUMP STARTING YOUR VEHICLE (LOW VOLTAGE [UNDERHOOD]
BATTERY ONLY)
Your vehicle has two separate jump starting procedures; the following
procedure is for the low voltage (underhood) battery only. Refer to
Jump starting the high voltage battery in this chapter for information
on jump starting the high voltage battery.
The gases around the battery can explode if exposed to flames,
sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could result in injury or
vehicle damage.
1 2 3
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
229
Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin, eyes and
clothing, if contacted.
Do not attempt to push-start your vehicle. This vehicle does not
have push-start capability; doing so may damage the catalytic
converter.
Preparing your vehicle
If your low voltage (underhood) battery becomes disconnected or
disabled for any reason, the vehicle controller must relearn the engine’s
operating characteristics in order to operate it at maximum efficiency.
This relearning process occurs the first time the vehicle is driven after
reconnecting the low voltage battery. If the learning procedure does not
have time to complete during the drive, the engine will continue to
operate for 3-5 seconds after you turn the ignition off to complete the
relearning process. This is a normal condition and will not re-occur
unless the low voltage battery is disconnected again.
1. Use only a 12–volt supply to start your vehicle.
2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could
damage the vehicle’s electrical system.
3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle
making sure the two vehicles do not touch. Set the parking brake on
both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving
parts.
4. Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion before
you attach the battery cables. Ensure that vent caps are tight and level.
5. Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect any electrical
surges. Turn all other accessories off.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
230
Connecting the jumper cables
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of
the discharged battery.
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the
assisting (boosting) battery.
2. Connect the other end of the positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the assisting battery.
+
–
+
–
+
–
+
–
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
231
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal of the
assisting battery.
4. Make the final connection of the negative (-) cable to an exposed
metal part of the stalled vehicle’s engine, away from the battery and the
carburetor/fuel injection system. Do not use fuel lines, engine rocker
covers or the intake manifold as grounding points.
Do not connect the end of the second cable to the negative (-)
terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may cause an
explosion of the gases that surround the battery.
5. Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades, belts, moving parts of
both engines, or any fuel delivery system parts.
Jump starting
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at
moderately increased speed.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been started, run both engines for an
additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables.
+
–
+
–
+
–
+
–
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
232
Removing the jumper cables
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were
connected.
1. Remove the jumper cable from the ground metal surface.
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the
assisting (boosting) battery.
2. Remove the jumper cable on the negative (-) connection of the
booster vehicle’s battery.
+
–
+
–
+
–
+
–
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
233
3. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the booster
vehicle’s battery.
4. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the
disabled vehicle’s battery.
After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables
removed, allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can
relearn its idle conditions.
JUMP STARTING THE HIGH VOLTAGE BATTERY
Your vehicle has two separate jump starting procedures; the following
procedure is for the cargo area high voltage battery only. Refer to the
Jump starting your vehicle (Low voltage [underhood] battery only)
section in this chapter for information on jump starting the low voltage
(underhood) battery.
The gases around the battery can explode if exposed to flames,
sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could result in injury or
vehicle damage.
+
–
+
–
+
–
+
–
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
234
The high voltage battery contains potassium hydroxide (a strong
alkaline electrolyte) which can burn skin, eyes and clothing, if
contacted.
Do not attempt to push-start your vehicle. This vehicle does not
have push-start capability; doing so may damage the catalytic
converter.
If you attempt to start your vehicle and the engine cranks but does not
start, the high voltage battery may need to be jump started.
The Service Soon (yellow wrench)
light in the instrument cluster may
also be illuminated and the message
center may display a message.
To jump start the high voltage
battery, turn the ignition to OFF,
open the access panel in the driver
side foot well and press the jump
start button. After pressing the
button, you should wait eight
minutes before attempting to start
the engine, otherwise the high
voltage battery may not receive
sufficient charge to start the engine.
The high voltage battery will use
voltage from the low voltage
(underhood) battery to charge itself.
When the button is pressed, the indicator light on the button will
illuminate. After eight minutes has passed, the indicator light will flash
rapidly for two minutes. Turn the ignition to RUN. You may now attempt
to start the engine. If you attempt to start the engine before the
eight minutes passes, the jump starting procedure will stop and
will have to be restarted if the engine does not start.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
235
If the engine still does not start after the first complete high voltage
jump start, a second jump start procedure can be attempted after a
two-minute period (indicated by the button light changing from a rapid
flash to no illumination). This jump start procedure can only be done
twice before the low voltage (underhood) battery becomes discharged
and must also be jump started.
If the jump start button is pressed, but the indicator on the button
flashes slowly, the low voltage (underhood) battery may not have enough
energy to charge the high voltage battery. If this occurs, refer to the
Jump starting your vehicle (Low voltage [underhood] battery only)
section in this chapter for information on jump starting the low voltage
(underhood) battery. You may perform another high voltage battery jump
start by pressing the jump start button after having connected the
jumper cables and starting the booster vehicle.
Once the engine is started, the jumper cables should be removed as
described in the Jump starting your vehicle (Low voltage
[underhood] battery only) section. If the indicator on the jump start
button continues to flash slowly, then the vehicle requires service.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
236
WRECKER TOWING
If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional towing
service or, if you are a member of a roadside assistance program, your
roadside assistance service provider.
It is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford Motor
Company has not approved a slingbelt towing procedure.
On FWD vehicles, if your vehicle is to be towed from the front, ensure
proper wheel lift equipment is used to raise the front wheels off the
ground. The rear wheels can be left on the ground when towed in this
fashion.
If your vehicle is to be towed from the rear using wheel lift equipment, it
is required that the front wheels (drive wheels) be placed on a dolly to
prevent damage to the automatic transaxle.
On 4WD vehicles, it is required that your vehicle be towed with a wheel
lift and dollies or flatbed equipment with all the wheels off the ground to
prevent damage to the automatic transaxle, 4WD system or vehicle.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
237
If the vehicle is towed by other means or incorrectly, vehicle
damage may occur.
In case of a roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle (without access
to wheel dollies, car hauling trailer, or flatbed transport vehicle) your
vehicle (regardless of transmission powertrain configuration) can be flat
towed (all wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:
• Place the transmission in N (Neutral).
• Maximum distance is 50 miles (80 km).
• Maximum speed is not to exceed 35 mph (56 km/h).
Ford Motor Company produces a towing manual for all authorized tow
truck operators. Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for
proper hook-up and towing procedures for your vehicle.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
238
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED
At home
You must take your Ford vehicle to an authorized Ford dealer for
warranty repairs. While any Ford dealership handling your vehicle line
will provide warranty service, we recommend you return to your selling
dealer who wants to ensure your continued satisfaction. Please note that
certain warranty repairs require special training and/or equipment, so not
all dealers are authorized to perform all warranty repairs. This means
that, depending on the warranty repair needed, you may have to take
your vehicle to another dealer. A reasonable time must be allowed to
perform a repair after taking your vehicle to the dealership. Repairs will
be made using Ford or Motorcraft parts, or remanufactured or other
parts that are authorized by Ford.
If you have questions or concerns, or are unsatisfied with the service you
are receiving, follow these steps:
1. Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your
selling/servicing dealership.
2. If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved, contact the Sales
Manager, Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification on Ford Motor Company
policies or procedures, please contact the Ford Customer Relationship
Center at the number below.
Away from home
If you own a Ford or Mercury vehicle and are away from home when
your vehicle needs service, or if you need more help than the dealership
could provide, after following the steps described above, contact the
Ford Customer Relationship Center to find an authorized dealership to
help you.
In the United States:
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48121
1-800-392-3673 (FORD)
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952)
www.customersaskford.com
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Customer Assistance
Customer Assistance
239
In Canada:
Customer Relationship Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
www.ford.ca
If you own a Lincoln vehicle and are away from home when your vehicle
needs service, or if you need more help than the dealership could
provide, after following the steps described above, contact the Ford
Customer Relationship Center to find an authorized dealership to help
you.
In the United States:
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48121
1-800-521-4140
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952)
www.customersaskford.com
In Canada:
Lincoln Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
1-800-387-9333
www.lincolncanada.com
In order to help you service your Lincoln vehicle, please have the
following information available when contacting the Lincoln Centre:
• Your telephone number (home and business)
• The name of the dealer and the city where the dealership is located
• The year and make of your vehicle
• The date of vehicle purchase
• The current odometer reading
• The vehicle identification number (VIN)
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Customer Assistance
240
Additional Assistance
If you still have a complaint involving a warranty dispute, you may wish
to contact the Dispute Settlement Board (U.S.).
In some states (in the U.S.) you must directly notify Ford in writing
before pursuing remedies under your state’s warranty laws. Ford is also
allowed a final repair attempt in some states.
In the United States, a warranty dispute must be submitted to the
Dispute Settlement Board before taking action under the Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act, or to the extent allowed by state law, before pursuing
replacement or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws. This
dispute handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state
created rights or other rights which are independent of the
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act or state replacement or repurchase laws.
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d) requires that, if a manufacturer
or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the
vehicle’s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of
attempts, the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the
vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or
payable by the consumer (less a reasonable allowance for consumer
use). The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund
or replacement vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) presumes that the manufacturer
has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its
applicable express warranties if, within the first 18 months of ownership
of a new vehicle or the first 18,000 miles (29,000 km), whichever occurs
first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made on the same non-conformity
likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity (a
defect or condition that substantially impairs the use, value or safety of
the vehicle) OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of
more than 30 calendar days (not necessarily all at one time)
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Customer Assistance
241
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer must also notify the
manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the
following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
THE DISPUTE SETTLEMENT BOARD (U.S. ONLY)
The Dispute Settlement Board is:
• an independent, third-party arbitration program for warranty disputes.
• available free to owners and lessees of qualifying Ford Motor Company
vehicles.
The Dispute Settlement Board may not be available in all states. Ford
Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility limitations, modify
procedures and/or to discontinue this service without notice and without
incurring obligations per applicable state law.
What kinds of cases does the Board review?
Unresolved warranty repair concerns or vehicle performance concerns as
on Ford and Lincoln Mercury cars and Ford and Lincoln Mercury light
trucks which are within the terms of any applicable written new vehicle
warranty are eligible for review, except those involving:
• a non-Ford product
• a non-Ford dealership
• sales disputes between customer and dealer except those associated
with warranty repairs or concerns with the vehicle’s performance as
designed
• a request for reimbursement of consequential expenses unless a
service or product concern is being reviewed
• items not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty (including
maintenance and wear items)
• alleged personal injury/property damage claims
• cases currently in litigation
• vehicles not used primarily for family, personal or household purposes
(except in states where the Dispute Settlement Board is required to
review commercial vehicles)
• vehicles with non-U.S. warranties
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Customer Assistance
242
Concerns are ineligible for review if the New Vehicle Limited Warranty
has expired at receipt of your application and, in certain states eligibility
is dependent upon the customer’s possession of the vehicle.
Eligibility may differ according to state law. For example, see the unique
brochures for California, West Virginia, Georgia and Wisconsin
purchasers/lessees.
Board membership
The Board consists of:
• Three consumer representatives
• A Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealership representative
Consumer candidates for Board membership are recruited and trained by
an independent consulting firm. The dealership Board member is chosen
from Ford and Lincoln Mercury dealership management, recognized for
their business leadership qualities.
What the Board needs
To have your case reviewed you must complete the application in the
DSB brochure and mail it to the address provided on the application
form. Some states will require you to use certified mail, with return
receipt requested.
Your application is reviewed and, if it is determined to be eligible, you
will receive an acknowledgment indicating:
• The file number assigned to your application.
• The toll-free phone number of the DSB’s independent administrator.
Your dealership and a Ford Motor Company representative will then be
asked to submit statements.
To properly review your case, the Board needs the following information:
• Legible copies of all documents and maintenance or repair orders
relevant to the case.
• The year, make, model, and Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) listed
on your vehicle ownership license.
• The date of repair(s) and mileage at the time of occurrence(s).
• The current mileage.
• The name of the dealer(s) who sold or serviced the vehicle.
• A brief description of your unresolved concern.
• A brief summary of the action taken by the dealer(s) and Ford Motor
Company.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Customer Assistance
243
• The names (if known) of all the people you contacted at the
dealership(s).
• A description of the action you expect to resolve your concern.
You will receive a letter of explanation if your application does not
qualify for Board review.
Oral presentations
If you would like to make an oral presentation, indicate YES to question
6 on the application. While it is your right to make an oral presentation
before the Board, this is not a requirement and the Board will decide the
case whether or not an oral presentation is made. An oral presentation
may be requested by the Board as well.
Making a decision
Board members review all available information related to each
complaint, including oral presentations, and arrive at a fair and impartial
decision. Board review may be terminated at any time by either party.
Every effort is made to decide the case within 40 days of the date that
all requested information is received by the Board. Since the Board
generally meets once a month, it may take longer for the Board to
consider some cases.
After a case is reviewed, the Board mails you a decision letter and a
form on which to accept or reject the Board’s decision. The decisions of
the Board are binding on Ford (and, in some cases, on the dealer) but
not on consumers who are free to pursue other remedies available to
them under state or federal law.
To request a DSB Brochure/Application
For a brochure/application, speak to your dealer or write/call the Board
at the following address/phone number:
Dispute Settlement Board
P.O. Box 1424
Waukesha, WI 53187–1424
1–800–428–3718
You may also contact the North American Customer Relationship Center
at 1-800-392-3673 (Ford), TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952
or by writing to the Center at the following address:
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, Michigan 48121
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Customer Assistance
244
UTILIZING THE MEDIATION/ARBITRATION PROGRAM
(CANADA ONLY)
In those cases where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford and
the dealer to resolve a factory-related vehicle service concern have been
unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates in an impartial third party
mediation/arbitration program administered by the Canadian Motor
Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
The CAMVAP program is a straight-forward and relatively speedy alternative
to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a settlement
have failed. This procedure is without cost to you and is designed to
eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal proceedings.
In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party arbitrators conduct
hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal
environment. These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the
parties, make decisions and, when appropriate, render awards to resolve
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair, and final; the arbitrator’s
award is binding both to you and Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all territories and provinces. For more
information, without charge or obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial
Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685.
FORD EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN
You can get more protection for your new car or light truck by
purchasing Ford Extended Service Plan (Ford ESP) coverage. It provides
the following:
• Benefits during the warranty period depending on the plan you
purchase (such as: reimbursement for rentals; coverage for certain
maintenance and wear items).
• Protection against covered repair costs after your Bumper-to-Bumper
Warranty expires.
You may purchase Ford ESP from any participating Ford and Lincoln
Mercury and Ford of Canada dealer. There are several plans available in
various time, distance and deductible combinations which can be tailored
to fit your own driving needs. Ford ESP also offers reimbursement
benefits for towing and rental coverage.
When you buy Ford ESP, you receive Peace-of-Mind protection throughout
the United States and Canada, provided by a network of more than 5,000
participating Ford or Lincoln Mercury and Ford of Canada dealers.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Customer Assistance
245
If you did not take advantage of the Ford Extended Service Plan at the
time of purchasing your vehicle, you may still be eligible. Since this
information is subject to change, please ask your dealer for complete
details about Ford Extended Service Plan coverage options, or visit the
Ford ESP website at www.ford-esp.com.
GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country, contact the
appropriate foreign embassy or consulate. These officials can inform you
of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel.
If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti-knock
index lower than is recommended for your vehicle, contact a district or
owner relations/customer relationship office.
The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may
damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause
engine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford Motor Company/Ford of
Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper
fuel.
In the United States, using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty
importing your vehicle back into the U.S.
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in
Central or South America, the Caribbean, or the Middle East, contact the
nearest Ford dealership. If the dealership cannot help you, write or call:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
WORLDWIDE DIRECT MARKET OPERATIONS
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (313) 594-4857
FAX: (313) 390-0804
If you are in another foreign country, contact the nearest Ford
dealership. If the dealership employees cannot help you, they can direct
you to the nearest Ford affiliate office.
If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate outside of
the U.S. or Canada, register your vehicle identification number (VIN) and
new address with Ford Motor Company Worldwide Direct Market
Operations.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Customer Assistance
246
ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER’S LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio, contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED
P.O. Box 07150
Detroit, Michigan 48207
Or call:
For a free publication catalog, order toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached by their website:
www.helminc.com.
(Items in this catalog may be purchased by credit card, check or
money order.)
Obtaining a French owner’s guide
French Owner’s Guides can be obtained from your dealer or by writing to
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited, Service Publications, P.O. Box
1580, Station B, Mississauga, Ontario L4Y 4G3.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a crash
or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and
if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Ford Motor
Company.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free
at 1–800–424–9393 (or 366–0123 in the Washington D.C. area) or write
to:
NHTSA
400 Seventh Street
U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
the Hotline.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Customer Assistance
247
WASHING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral
Ph shampoo, such as Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3–A), which is available
from your dealer.
• Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as dish washing
or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted
surfaces.
• Never wash a vehicle that is “hot to the touch” or during exposure to
strong, direct sunlight.
• Always use a clean sponge or car wash mitt with plenty of water for
best results.
• Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to
eliminate water spotting.
• It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the
winter months, as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and cause
damage to the vehicle.
• Immediately remove items such as gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings
and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle’s
paintwork and trim over time.
• Remove any exterior accessories, such as antennas, before entering a
car wash.
• Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted
surface; if these substances come in contact with your vehicle,
wash off as soon as possible.
• Use care when washing the vehicle to ensure water and soap
are not directed into the high voltage battery vent, located
near the driver side rear window.
WAXING
Applying a polymer paint sealant to your vehicle every six months will
assist in reducing minor scratches and paint damage.
• Wash the vehicle first.
• Do not use waxes that contain abrasives.
• Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non-body
(low-gloss black) colored trim, such as grained door handles, roof
racks, bumpers, side moldings, mirror housings or the windshield cowl
area. The paint sealant will “gray” or stain the parts over time.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Cleaning
Cleaning
248
PAINT CHIPS
Your dealer has touch-up paint and sprays to match your vehicle’s color.
Take your color code (printed on a sticker in the driver’s door jam) to
your dealer to ensure you get the correct color.
• Remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips.
• Always read the instructions before using the products.
ALUMINUM WHEELS AND WHEEL COVERS
Aluminum wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clearcoat paint
finish. In order to maintain their shine:
• Clean weekly with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37–A),
which is available from your dealer. Heavy dirt and brake dust
accumulation may require agitation with a sponge. Rinse thoroughly
with a strong stream of water.
• Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or
covers.
• Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your
wheel rims or covers. Chemical-strength cleaners, or cleaning
chemicals, in combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust
and dirt, could wear away the clearcoat finish over time.
• Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel
cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergent.
• To remove tar and grease, use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover
(ZC-42), available from your dealer.
ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt
buildup keep the engine warmer than normal. When washing:
• Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine. The
high-pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause
damage.
• Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the
engine block or other engine components.
• Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (ZC-20) on all parts
that require cleaning and pressure rinse clean.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Cleaning
249
• Cover the highlighted areas to prevent water damage when cleaning
the engine. Note: As with all transmissions, be especially careful as
water entry into the vents can damage internal parts.
• Never wash or rinse the engine while it is running; water in the
running engine may cause internal damage.
PLASTIC (NON-PAINTED) EXTERIOR PARTS
Use only approved products to clean plastic parts. These products are
available from your dealer.
• For routine cleaning, use Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3–A).
• If tar or grease spots are present, use Motorcraft Bug and Tar
Remover (ZC-42).
WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES
The windshield, rear and side windows and the wiper blades should be
cleaned regularly. If the wipers do not wipe properly, substances on the
vehicle’s glass or the wiper blades may be the cause. These may include
hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes, tree sap, or other
organic contamination. To clean these items, please follow these tips:
• The windshield, rear windows and side windows may be cleaned with
a non-abrasive cleaner such as Motorcraft Ultra Clear Spray Glass
Cleaner (ZC-23), available from your dealer.
• Do not use abrasives, as they may cause scratches.
• Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean any parts.
• Wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol or
windshield washer solution. Be sure to replace wiper blades when they
appear worn or do not function properly.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Cleaning
250
Do not use sharp objects, such as a razor blade, to clean the
inside of the rear window or to remove decals, as it may cause
damage to the rear window defroster’s heated grid lines.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CLUSTER LENS
Clean the instrument panel with a damp cloth, then dry with a dry cloth.
• Avoid cleaners or polish that increase the gloss of the upper portion of
the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect the
driver from undesirable windshield reflection.
Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning
the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid contamination of
the air bag system.
• Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in
contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan
lotion in order to avoid possible damage to the interior painted
surfaces.
INTERIOR TRIM
• Clean the interior trim areas with a damp cloth, then dry by wiping
with a dry, soft, clean cloth.
• Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the
finish.
INTERIOR
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, safety belts and seats equipped with side
air bags:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.
• Remove light stains and soil with Motorcraft Extra Strength
Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-41).
• If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first
with Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (ZC-14).
• Never saturate the seat covers with cleaning solution.
• Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can
stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of
the seat materials.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Cleaning
251
Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or dye on the vehicle’s
safety belts, as these actions may weaken the belt webbing.
Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning
the seat-mounted side air bag. Such products could contaminate
the side air bag system and affect performance of the side air bag in a
collision.
LEATHER SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
Your leather seating surfaces have a clear, protective coating over the
leather.
• To clean, use a soft cloth with Motorcraft Deluxe Leather and Vinyl
Cleaner (ZC-11–A). Dry the area with a soft cloth.
• To help maintain its resiliency and color, use the Motorcraft Deluxe
Leather Care Kit (ZC-11–D), available from your authorized dealer.
• Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or
cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl and plastics, or oil/petroleum-based
leather conditioners. These products may cause premature wearing of
the clear, protective coating.
Note: In some instances, color or dye transfer can occur when wet
clothing comes in contact with leather upholstery. If this occurs, the
leather should be cleaned immediately to avoid permanent staining.
UNDERBODY
Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently. Keep body and
door drain holes free from packed dirt.
FORD, LINCOLN AND MERCURY CAR CARE PRODUCTS
Your Ford, Lincoln or Mercury dealer has many quality products available
to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes. These quality products
have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive needs; they
are custom designed to complement the style and appearance of your
vehicle. Each product is made from high quality materials that meet or
exceed rigid specifications. For best results, use the following products
or products of equivalent quality:
Motorcraft Custom Clearcoat Polish (ZC–8–A)
Motorcraft Custom Vinyl Protectant (not available in Canada) (ZC-40–A)
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Cleaning
252
Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-93)
Motorcraft Vinyl Conditioner (Canada only) (CXC-94)
Motorcraft Deluxe Leather and Vinyl Cleaner (not available in Canada)
(ZC-11–A)
Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover (ZC-42)
Motorcraft Extra Strength Upholstery Cleaner (not available in Canada)
(ZC-41)
Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15)
Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37–A)
Motorcraft Dash and Vinyl Cleaner (ZC-38–A)
Motorcraft Car Care Kit (ZC-26)
Motorcraft Premium Car Wash Concentrate (ZC-17-B)
Motorcraft Carlite Glass Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-100)
Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (ZC-14)
Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3–A)
Motorcraft Tire Clean and Shine (ZC-28)
Motorcraft Triple Clean (ZC-13)
Motorcraft Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (not available in Canada)
(ZC-23)
Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (ZC-20)
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Cleaning
253
SERVICE RECOMMENDATIONS
To help you service your vehicle:
• We highlight do-it-yourself items in the engine compartment for easy
location.
• We provide a scheduled maintenance guide which makes tracking
routine service easy.
If your vehicle requires professional service, your dealership can provide
the necessary parts and service. Check your Warranty Guide/Owner
Information Guide to find out which parts and services are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts
conforming to specifications. Motorcraft parts are designed and built to
provide the best performance in your vehicle.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE
• Do not work on a hot engine.
• Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts.
• Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed
space, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation.
• Keep all open flames and other lit material away from the battery and
all fuel related parts.
High Voltage Information
Exposure to high voltage may result in severe personal injury or
death. High voltage components must be serviced by a trained
service technician.
Your vehicle consists of various high voltage components and wiring. All
of the high voltage power flows through specific wiring assemblies which
are labeled as such and/or are covered with a solid orange convolute or
orange stripe tape. Do not come in contact with these components.
The following are specific locations in the rear cargo area that consist of
high voltage components and/or wiring.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Maintenance and Specifications
254
1. High voltage connector shield
2. Service Disconnect
3. High voltage battery case
Working with the engine off
1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).
2. Turn off the engine and remove the key.
3. Block the wheels.
Working with the engine on
1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).
2. Block the wheels.
Note: Do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not
remove it while the engine is running.
1
2
3
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
255
OPENING THE HOOD
1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood
release handle located under the
bottom of the instrument panel.
2. At the front of the vehicle, lift up on the auxiliary latch handle located
in the center between the hood and the grille.
3. Lift the hood open and secure it with the prop rod.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
256
IDENTIFYING COMPONENTS IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT
2.3L I4 engine
1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Motor/Electronics (M/E) coolant reservoir
3. Engine oil filler cap
4. Brake fluid reservoir
5. Power distribution box
6. Low Voltage (underhood) battery
7. Engine Air filter assembly
8. Engine oil dipstick
9. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
8 7 6
3
1 2
4 5
9
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
257
WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the
level is low. In very cold weather, do
not fill the reservoir completely.
Only use a washer fluid that meets Ford specifications. Refer to
Lubricant specifications in this chapter.
State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the
use of methanol, a common windshield washer antifreeze additive.
Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used
only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the
vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or washer system.
If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below 40° F (4.5°C),
use washer fluid with antifreeze protection. Failure to use
washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could result in
impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or accident.
Note: Do not put washer fluid in the engine coolant reservoir. Washer
fluid placed in the cooling system may harm engine and cooling system
components.
Checking and adding washer fluid for the liftgate
Washer fluid for the liftgate is supplied by the same reservoir as the
windshield.
ENGINE OIL
Checking the engine oil
Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for the appropriate intervals
for checking the engine oil.
1. Make sure the vehicle is on level ground.
2. Turn the engine off and wait a few minutes for the oil to drain into the
oil pan.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
258
3. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P
(Park) (automatic transmissions) or 1 (First) (manual transmissions).
4. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat.
5. Locate and carefully remove the
engine oil level indicator (dipstick).
6. Wipe the indicator clean. Insert the indicator fully, then remove it
again.
• If the oil level is between the MIN and MAX marks, the oil level is
acceptable. DO NOT ADD OIL.
• If the oil level is below the MIN mark, add enough oil to raise the level
within the MIN-MAX range.
• Oil levels above the MAX mark, may cause engine damage. Some oil
must be removed from the engine by a service technician.
7. Put the indicator back in and ensure it is fully seated.
Adding engine oil
1. Check the engine oil. For instructions, refer to Checking the engine
oil in this chapter.
2. If the engine oil level is not within the normal range, add only certified
engine oil of the recommended viscosity. Remove the engine oil filler cap
and use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the opening.
3. Recheck the engine oil level. Make sure the oil level is not above the
FULL mark on the engine oil level indicator (dipstick).
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
259
4. Install the indicator and ensure it is fully seated.
5. Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap clockwise
1/4 of a turn until it is seated.
To avoid possible oil loss, DO NOT operate the vehicle with the
engine oil level indicator and/or the engine oil filler cap removed.
Engine oil and filter recommendations
Look for this certification
trademark.
Use SAE 5W-20 engine oil.
Only use oils “Certified For Gasoline Engines” by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). An oil with this trademark symbol conforms
to the current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel
economy requirements of the International Lubricant Standardization and
Approval Committee (ISLAC), comprised of U.S. and Japanese
automobile manufacturers.
To protect your engine’s warranty use Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 or an
equivalent 5W-20 oil meeting Ford specification WSS-M2C930-A. SAE
5W-20 oil provides optimum fuel economy and durability
performance meeting all requirements for your vehicle’s engine.
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives, cleaners or other engine
treatments. They are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that
is not covered by Ford warranty.
Change your engine oil and filter according to the appropriate schedule
listed in the scheduled maintenance guide.
Ford production and aftermarket (Motorcraft) oil filters are designed for
added engine protection and long life. If a replacement oil filter is used
that does not meet Ford material and design specifications, start-up
engine noises or knock may be experienced.
It is recommended you use the appropriate Motorcraft oil filter (or
another brand meeting Ford specifications) for your engine application.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
260
LOW VOLTAGE (UNDERHOOD) BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a
Motorcraft maintenance-free battery
which normally does not require
additional water during its life of
service.
However, for severe usage or in high temperature climates, check the
battery electrolyte level. Refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide for
the service interval schedules.
Keep the electrolyte level in each cell up to the “level indicator”.
Do not overfill the battery cells.
If the electrolyte level in the battery is low, you can add plain tap water
to the battery, as long as you do not use hard water (water with a high
mineral or alkali content). If possible, however, try to only fill the battery
cells with distilled water. If the battery needs water often, have the
charging system checked.
If your battery has a cover/shield, make sure it is reinstalled
after the battery has been cleaned or replaced.
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and
dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to
the battery terminals.
If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables
from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize the
acid with a solution of baking soda and water.
Note: Electrical or electronic accessories or components added to
the vehicle by the dealer or the owner may adversely affect
battery performance and durability.
Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can cause
personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks or lighted
substances to come near the battery. When working near the battery,
always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide proper
ventilation.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
261
When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure on the
end walls could cause acid to flow through the vent caps,
resulting in personal injury and/or damage to the vehicle or battery.
Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite
corners.
Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries contain sulfuric
acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes
when working near the battery to protect against possible splashing of
acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or eyes, flush
immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt
medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician immediately.
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and
lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
If the battery is disconnected, the Regenerative Braking System will need
to relearn the initial brake pedal position. After reconnecting the battery,
slowly depress and release the brake pedal one time.
Because your vehicle’s engine is electronically controlled by a computer,
some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery. When
the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the engine must
relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum driveability and
performance. To begin this process:
1. With the vehicle at a complete stop, set the parking brake.
2. Put the gearshift in P (Park), turn off all accessories and start the
engine.
3. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature.
4. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
5. Turn the A/C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
6. Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process.
• The vehicle may need to be driven 10 miles (16 km) or more to
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy.
• If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim, the idle
quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle
trim is eventually relearned.
If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed,
the clock and the preset radio stations must be reset once the battery is
reconnected.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
262
• Always dispose of automotive
batteries in a responsible manner.
Follow your local authorized
standards for disposal. Call your
local authorized recycling center
to find out more about recycling
automotive batteries.
Low and high voltage battery – storage
Your vehicle must be started and run for a minimum of 10 minutes once
a month in order to maintain the high voltage battery charge. This will
maintain the high voltage battery but it is not enough to maintain the
low voltage (underhood) battery and additional low voltage (underhood)
battery charging may be required after 60 days.
If your vehicle is to be stored for 60 days or longer, the low voltage
(underhood) battery negative terminal must be disconnected. Do not
store your vehicle for more than 6 months without starting and fully
charging both battery systems. Failure to do this could damage your
vehicle’s battery systems.
ENGINE COOLANT AND MOTOR/ELECTRONICS COOLANT
Your vehicle is equipped with two seperate coolant systems. One is for
engine cooling and the other is for various electric motors and other
components that are specific to the Hybrid Escape operating systems.
LEAD
RETURN
RECYCLE
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
263
Checking engine coolant
The concentration and level of
engine coolant should be checked at
the mileage intervals listed in the
Scheduled Maintenance Guide.
The coolant concentration should be
maintained at 50/50 coolant and
distilled water, which equates to a
freeze point of -34°F (-36°C).
Coolant concentration testing is
possible with a hydrometer or
antifreeze tester (such as the
Rotunda Battery and Antifreeze
Tester, 014–R1060). The level of
coolant should be maintained at the
“FULL COLD” level or within the
“COLD FILL RANGE” in the coolant
reservoir. If the level falls below, add
coolant per the instructions in the
Adding engine coolant section.
Checking motor/electronics (M/E) coolant
The M/E coolant reservoir is located
behind the engine coolant reservoir.
Refer to the following engine
coolant sections for all information,
instructions and warnings related to
cooling systems. The two systems
use the same coolant and operate
similarly, with the Motor and
Electronics system generally
operating at a lower temperature
and pressure. The fluid levels in
both reservoirs need to be
maintained.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
264
Factory fill and coolant specifications
Your vehicle was factory-filled with a 50/50 engine coolant and water
concentration. If the concentration of coolant falls below 40% or above
60%, the engine parts could become damaged or not work properly. A
50–50 mixture of coolant and water provides the following:
• Freeze protection down to -34°F (-36°C).
• Boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• Protection against rust and other forms of corrosion.
• Enables calibrated gauges to work properly.
Common instructions for cooling systems
• The engine coolant should be at the “FULL COLD” level or within the
“COLD FILL RANGE” as listed on the engine coolant reservoir
(depending upon application).
• Refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide for service interval
schedules.
• Be sure to read and understand Precautions when servicing your
vehicle in this chapter.
If the engine coolant has not been checked at the recommended interval,
the engine coolant reservoir may become low or empty. If the reservoir is
low or empty, add engine coolant to the reservoir. Refer to Adding
engine coolant in this chapter.
Note: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable; do not use engine
coolant, antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified
function and vehicle location.
Adding engine coolant
When adding coolant, make sure it is a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant
and distilled water. Add the mixture to the coolant reservoir, when the
engine is cool, until the appropriate fill level is obtained.
Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot. Steam and
scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system can burn you
badly. Also, you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts.
Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer fluid
container. If sprayed on the windshield, engine coolant could
make it difficult to see through the windshield.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
265
• Add Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant
(yellow-colored), VC-7–A (U.S., except CA and OR), VC-7–B
(CA and OR only), meeting Ford Specification
WSS-M97B51–A1.
Note: Use of Motorcraft Cooling System Stop Leak Pellets, VC-6, may
darken the color of Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant from
yellow to golden tan.
• Do not add/mix an orange-colored, extended life coolant such
as Motorcraft Speciality Orange Engine Coolant, VC-2 (US) or
CXC-209 (Canada), meeting Ford specification WSS-M97B44–D
with the factory-filled coolant. Mixing Motorcraft Speciality Orange
Engine Coolant or any orange-colored extended life product with your
factory filled coolant can result in degraded corrosion protection.
• A large amount of water without engine coolant may be added, in case
of emergency, to reach a vehicle service location. In this instance, the
cooling system must be drained and refilled with a 50/50 mixture of
engine coolant and distilled water as soon as possible. Water alone
(without engine coolant) can cause engine damage from corrosion,
overheating or freezing.
• Do not use alcohol, methanol, brine or any engine coolants
mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze (coolant). Alcohol
and other liquids can cause engine damage from overheating or
freezing.
• Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant. These
can be harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine
coolant.
For vehicles with overflow coolant systems with a non-pressurized cap
on the coolant recovery system, add coolant to the coolant recovery
reservoir when the engine is cool. Add the proper mixture of coolant and
water to the “FULL COLD” level. For all other vehicles which have a
coolant degas system with a pressurized cap, or if it is necessary to
remove the coolant pressure relief cap on the radiator of a vehicle with
an overflow system, follow these steps to add engine coolant.
To reduce the risk of personal injury, make sure the engine is
cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap. The
cooling system is under pressure; steam and hot liquid can come out
forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly.
1. Before you begin, turn the engine off and let it cool.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
266
2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick cloth around the coolant
pressure relief cap on the coolant reservoir (a translucent plastic bottle).
Slowly turn cap counterclockwise (left) until pressure begins to release.
3. Step back while the pressure releases.
4. When you are sure that all the pressure has been released, use the
cloth to turn it counterclockwise and remove the cap.
5. Fill the coolant reservoir slowly with the proper coolant mixture (see
above), to within the “COLD FILL RANGE” or the “FULL COLD” level on
the reservoir. If you removed the radiator cap in an overflow system, fill
the radiator until the coolant is visible and radiator is almost full.
6. Replace the cap. Turn until tightly installed. (Cap must be tightly
installed to prevent coolant loss.)
After any coolant has been added, check the coolant concentration (refer
to Checking engine coolant). If the concentration is not 50/50
(protection to –34° F/–36° C), drain some coolant and adjust the
concentration. It may take several drains and additions to obtain a 50/50
coolant concentration.
Whenever coolant has been added, the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle. If
necessary, add enough 50/50 concentration of engine coolant and
distilled water to bring the liquid level to the proper level.
If you have to add more than 1.0 quart (1.0 liter) of engine coolant per
month, have your dealer check the engine cooling system. Your cooling
system may have a leak. Operating an engine with a low level of coolant
can result in engine overheating and possible engine damage.
Recycled engine coolant
Ford Motor Company does NOT recommend the use of recycled engine
coolant in vehicles originally equipped with Motorcraft Premium Gold
Engine Coolant since a Ford-approved recycling process is not yet available.
Used engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriate
manner. Follow your community’s regulations and standards for recycling
and disposing of automotive fluids.
Coolant refill capacity
To find out how much fluid your vehicle’s cooling system can hold, refer
to Refill capacities in this section.
Fill your engine coolant reservoir as outlined in Adding engine coolant
in this section.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
267
Severe climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates (less than –34° F[–36° C ]):
• It may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration
above 50%.
• NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60%.
• Increased engine coolant concentrations above 60% will
decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
• Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate
freeze protection at the temperatures in which you drive in the
winter months.
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
• It is still necessary to maintain the coolant concentration
above 40%.
• NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40%.
• Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will
decrease the corrosion protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
• Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will
decrease the freeze protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
• Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate
protection at the temperatures in which you drive.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates should use a 50/50
mixture of engine coolant and distilled water for optimum cooling system
and engine protection.
WHAT YOU SHOULD KNOW ABOUT AUTOMOTIVE FUELS
Important safety precautions
Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank
may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
268
The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is
venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops
before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out and injure you or others.
If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, excessive pressure or
vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause
the fuel cap to disengage in a collision, which may result in possible
personal injury.
Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death if misused or
mishandled.
Gasoline may contain benzene, which is a cancer-causing agent.
Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel:
• Extinguish all smoking materials
and any open flames before
fueling your vehicle.
• Always turn off the vehicle before
fueling.
• Automotive fuels can be harmful
or fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as gasoline is highly toxic and if
swallowed can cause death or permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed,
call a physician immediately, even if no symptoms are immediately
apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for hours.
• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind
can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases,
excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious
illness and permanent injury.
• Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If fuel is splashed in the eyes,
remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes and
seek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention could
lead to permanent injury.
• Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If fuel is
splashed on the skin and/or clothing, promptly remove contaminated
clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Repeated or
prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
269
• Be particularly careful if you are taking “Antabuse” or other forms of
disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing gasoline vapors,
or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction. In sensitive
individuals, serious personal injury or sickness may result. If fuel is
splashed on the skin, promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and
water. Consult a physician immediately if you experience an adverse
reaction.
When refueling always shut the engine off and never allow
sparks or open flames near the filler neck. Never smoke while
refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain conditions.
Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes.
The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can produce static
electricity, which can cause a fire if fuel is pumped into an
ungrounded fuel container.
Use the following guidelines to avoid static build-up when filling an
ungrounded fuel container:
• Place approved fuel container on the ground.
• DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle (including the
cargo area).
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while
filling.
• DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill
position.
Fuel Filler Cap
Your fuel tank filler cap has an indexed design with a 1/4 turn on/off
feature.
When fueling your vehicle:
1. Turn the engine/ignition switch to the off position.
2. Carefully turn the filler cap counterclockwise 1/4 of a turn until it
stops.
3. Pull to remove the cap from the fuel filler pipe.
4. To install the cap, align the tabs on the cap with the notches on the
filler pipe.
5. Turn the filler cap clockwise 1/4 of a turn until it stops.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
270
After refueling, if the “CHECK FUEL CAP” indicator comes on and stays
on when you start the engine, the fuel filler cap may not be properly
installed. Turn off the engine, remove the fuel filler cap, align the cap
properly and reinstall it securely. The “CHECK FUEL CAP” indicator
should turn off after three driving cycles with the fuel filler cap properly
installed. A driving cycle consists of a cold engine start-up followed by
mixed city/highway driving.
If you must replace the fuel filler cap, replace it with a fuel filler
cap that is designed for your vehicle. The customer warranty may
be void for any damage to the fuel tank or fuel system if the
correct genuine Ford or Motorcraft fuel filler cap is not used.
The fuel system may be under pressure. Remove fuel filler cap
slowly. Otherwise, fuel may spray out and injure you or others.
If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, excessive vacuum in
the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause the fuel cap
to disengage in a collision, which may result in possible personal injury.
Choosing the right fuel
Use only UNLEADED FUEL. The use of leaded fuel is prohibited by law
and could damage your vehicle.
Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic
compounds, including manganese-based additives. Studies indicate that
these additives can cause your vehicle’s emission control system to
deteriorate more rapidly. In Canada, premium grade fuel generally
contains more metallic additives than regular fuel. We recommend using
regular grade fuel. In Canada, many fuels contain metallic additives, but
fuels free of such additives may be available; check with your local fuel
dealer.
Do not use fuel containing methanol. It can damage critical fuel system
components.
Repairs to correct the effects of using a fuel for which your vehicle was
not designed may not be covered by your warranty.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
271
Octane recommendations
Your vehicle is designed to use
“Regular” unleaded gasoline with
pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.
We do not recommend the use of
gasolines labeled as “Regular” that
are sold with octane ratings of 86 or lower in high altitude areas.
Do not be concerned if your engine sometimes knocks lightly. However, if
it knocks heavily under most driving conditions while you are using fuel
with the recommended octane rating, see your dealer or a qualified
service technician to prevent any engine damage.
Fuel quality
If you are experiencing starting, rough idle or hesitation driveability
problems, try a different brand of unleaded gasoline. “Premium”
unleaded gasoline is not recommended for vehicles designed to use
“Regular” unleaded gasoline because it may cause these problems to
become more pronounced. If the problems persist, see your dealer or a
qualified service technician.
It should not be necessary to add any aftermarket products to your fuel
tank if you continue to use high quality fuel of the recommended octane
rating. Aftermarket products could cause damage to the fuel system.
Repairs to correct the effects of using an aftermarket product in your
fuel may not be covered by your warranty.
Many of the world’s automakers approved the World-wide Fuel Charter
that recommends gasoline specifications to provide improved performance
and emission control system protection for your vehicle. Gasolines that
meet the World-wide Fuel Charter should be used when available. Ask
your fuel supplier about gasolines that meet the World-wide Fuel Charter.
Cleaner air
Ford endorses the use of reformulated “cleaner-burning” gasolines to
improve air quality.
Running out of fuel
Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse
affect on powertrain components.
If you have run out of fuel:
• You may need to cycle the ignition from OFF to ON several times after
refueling, to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to
the engine.
• The
indicator may come on. For more information on the “Check
Engine” indicator, refer to the Instrument Cluster chapter.
87
(R+M)/2 METHOD
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
272
Fuel Filter
For fuel filter replacement, see your dealer or a qualified service
technician. Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for the appropriate
intervals for changing the fuel filter.
Replace the fuel filter with an authorized Motorcraft part. The
customer warranty may be void for any damage to the fuel system
if an authorized Motorcraft fuel filter is not used.
ESSENTIALS OF GOOD FUEL ECONOMY
Measuring techniques
Your best source of information about actual fuel economy is you, the
driver. You must gather information as accurately and consistently as
possible. Fuel expense, frequency of fill-ups or fuel gauge readings are
NOT accurate as a measure of fuel economy. We do not recommend taking
fuel economy measurements during the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of
driving (engine break-in period). You will get a more accurate
measurement after 2,000 miles-3,000 miles (3,000 km–5,000 km).
Filling the tank
When the fuel gauge indicates empty, there is still a small reserve of fuel
in the fuel system. When refueling your vehicle after the fuel gauge
indicates empty, you might not be able to refuel the full amount of the
advertised capacity of the fuel tank due to the empty reserve still
present in the tank. The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve
varies and should not be relied upon to increase driving range.
For consistent results when filling the fuel tank:
• Turn the engine/ignition switch to the off position prior to refueling,
an error in the reading will result if the engine is left running.
• Allow no more than 2 automatic click-offs when filling.
• Always use fuel with the recommended octane rating.
• Use a known quality gasoline, preferably a national brand.
Your results will be most accurate if your filling method is consistent.
Calculating fuel economy
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading
(in miles or kilometers).
2. Each time you fill the tank, record the amount of fuel added (in
gallons or liters).
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
273
3. After at least three to five tank fill-ups, fill the fuel tank and record
the current odometer reading.
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer
reading.
5. Follow one of the simple calculations in order to determine fuel
economy:
Calculation 1: Divide total miles traveled by total gallons used.
Calculation 2: Multiply liters used by 100, then divide by total
kilometers traveled.
Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving (city
or highway). This will provide an accurate estimate of the vehicle’s fuel
economy under current driving conditions. Additionally, keeping records
during summer and winter will show how temperature impacts fuel
economy. In general, lower temperatures give lower fuel economy.
Driving style — good driving and fuel economy habits
Since it is able to operate in electric mode and to collect braking energy,
your Ford Escape Hybrid Electric vehicle will get better fuel economy in
city driving than on the highway. This is contrary to conventional
vehicles. However, many of the same actions that improve fuel economy
in a conventional vehicle will also improve fuel economy in this vehicle.
Give consideration to the lists that follow and you may be able to change
a number of variables and improve your fuel economy.
Habits
• Avoid aggressive driving. Quick acceleration and deceleration decrease
fuel economy.
• Drive at a smooth, constant speed. Excessive variation in pedal input
causes more operating mode changes and reduces efficiency.
• Drive at reasonable speeds. Traveling at 60 mph [96 km/h] uses
approximately 20% less fuel than traveling at 70 mph [112 km/h]).
• Minimize A/C and defroster usage. Selecting MAX A/C, defrost, or
defrost/floor mode on the climate control system will force the engine
to run continuously and reduce fuel economy.
• Minimize temperature extremes when the vehicle is parked, for
example by storing in a garage to avoid extreme cold in winter and
extreme sun loads in summer. The high voltage battery operates more
efficiently in moderate temperatures.
• Combine errands. Your vehicle is more fuel efficient when the engine
is warm. Driving to your farthest destination first will warm the engine
more quickly and may improve fuel economy for the rest of the trip.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
274
Maintenance
• Keep tires properly inflated and use only recommended size.
• Keep wheels properly aligned.
• Use recommended engine oil. Refer to Lubricant specifications in
this chapter.
• Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance items. Follow the
recommended maintenance schedule and owner maintenance checks
found in your vehicle scheduled maintenance guide.
Conditions
• Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a trailer may reduce fuel economy
at any speed.
• Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy (approximately
0.4 km/L [1 mpg] is lost for every 136 kg [300 lb] of weight carried).
• Adding certain accessories to your vehicle (for example bug
deflectors, rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski/luggage racks, flags)
may reduce fuel economy.
• Using fuel blended with alcohol may lower fuel economy.
• Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel economy as compared to
driving on hilly terrain.
• Close windows for high speed driving.
EPA window sticker
Every new vehicle should have the EPA window sticker. Contact your
dealer if the window sticker is not supplied with your vehicle. The EPA
window sticker should be your guide for the fuel economy comparisons
with other vehicles.
It is important to note the box in the lower left corner of the window
sticker. These numbers represent the Range of MPG (L/100 km)
expected on the vehicle under optimum conditions. Your fuel economy
may vary depending upon the method of operation and conditions.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
275
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a
catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with applicable
exhaust emission standards. To make sure that the catalytic converter and
other emission control components continue to work properly:
• Use only the specified fuel listed.
• Avoid running out of fuel.
• Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving, especially at
high speeds.
• Have the items listed in your Scheduled Maintenance Guide
performed according to the specified schedule.
The scheduled maintenance items listed in the Scheduled Maintenance
Guide are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle and to its
emissions system.
If other than Ford, Motorcraft or Ford-authorized parts are used for
maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting
emission control, such non-Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine
Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability.
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry
ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine
compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
Illumination of the
indicator, charging system warning light or the
temperature warning light, fluid leaks, strange odors, smoke or loss of
engine power could indicate that the emission control system is not
working properly.
Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and potentially
lethal fumes into the passenger compartment.
Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. By law,
vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures, repairs, services, sells,
leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not permitted to
intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent it from working.
Information about your vehicle’s emission system is on the Vehicle
Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the engine. This
decal identifies engine displacement and gives some tune up specifications.
Please consult your Warranty Guide for complete emission warranty
information.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
276
On board diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine’s
emission control system. This system is commonly known as the On
Board Diagnostics System (OBD-II). This OBD-II system protects the
environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet
government emission standards. The OBD-II system also assists the
service technician in properly servicing your vehicle. When the Check
engine/Service engine soon light illuminates, the OBD-II system has
detected a malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may cause your Check
engine/Service engine soon light to illuminate. Examples are:
1. The vehicle has run out of fuel. (The engine may misfire or run poorly.)
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel.
3. The fuel cap may not have been securely tightened.
These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank
with good quality fuel and/or properly tightening the fuel cap. After three
driving cycles without these or any other temporary malfunctions
present, the Check engine/Service engine soon light should turn off. (A
driving cycle consists of a cold engine startup followed by mixed
city/highway driving.) No additional vehicle service is required.
If the Check engine/Service engine soon light remains on, have your
vehicle serviced at the first available opportunity.
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an I/M test of
the on-board diagnostics system. If your
indicator is on, refer to the
description in the Warning lights and chimes section of the
Instrument Cluster chapter. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test with
the
indicator on.
If the vehicle’s powertrain system or its battery has just been serviced,
the on-board diagnostics system is reset to a “not ready for I/M test”
condition. To ready the on-board diagnostics system for I/M testing, a
minimum of 30 minutes of city and highway driving is necessary as
described below:
• First, at least 10 minutes of driving on an expressway or highway.
• Next, at least 20 minutes driving in stop-and-go, city-type traffic with
at least four idle periods.
Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the
engine. Then, start the engine and complete the above driving cycle. The
engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature. Once started,
do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
277
BRAKE FLUID RESERVOIR
The fluid level will drop slowly as
the brakes wear, and will rise when
the brake components are replaced.
Fluid levels between the “MIN” and
“MAX” lines are within the normal
operating range; there is no need to
add fluid. If the fluid levels are
outside of the normal operating
range the performance of your
brake system could be
compromised; seek service from
your dealer immediately.
Brake pad replacement information
The Regenerative Braking System checks the integrity of the brake
system at times when the vehicle is parked. This is done by developing
brake pressure for short periods of time. In order to change the brake
pads, it is necessary to enter the Pad Service Mode. This will prevent
brake pressure from being applied.
To enter the Pad Service Mode, perform the following with the vehicle
stationary:
1. Place the vehicle in Park and turn ignition On.
2. Apply the brake pedal.
3. Turn the ignition OFF, then ON three times and then release the brake
pedal. The total time elapsed for the three ignition cycles and brake
release must be less than 3 seconds.
The brake warning lamp will:
• flash as stored hydraulic pressure is released.
• remain illuminated once the pressure is completely released.
• flash if the brake is applied.
To exit the Pad Service Mode:
1. Apply the brake pedal and turn the ignition OFF then ON. This will
cause brake pressure to be developed within the brake system. Once
brake pressure is developed, the brake warning light will turn off.
2. The Pad Service Mode will also be exited if the gear shift lever is
moved from the Park position, the vehicle is moved (wheels rotate) or
the ignition is turned OFF.
MAX
MIN
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
278
NOTE: The brake system on the Hybrid Escape can only be bled at a
qualified Ford dealer.
TRANSMISSION FLUID
Checking electronically controlled continuously variable
transmission (eCVT)
Refer to your Scheduled Maintenance Guide chapter for scheduled
intervals for fluid checks and changes. Your transaxle does not consume
fluid. It is designed to be filled for life. However, the fluid level should be
checked if you notice some sign of fluid leakage.
Automatic transmission fluid expands when warmed. To obtain an
accurate fluid check, drive the vehicle until it is warmed up
(approximately 20 miles [30 km]). If your vehicle has been
operated for an extended period at high speeds, in city traffic
during hot weather or pulling a trailer, the vehicle should be
turned off for about 30 minutes to allow fluid to cool before
checking.
1. Drive the vehicle 20 miles (30 km) or until it reaches normal operating
temperature.
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and engage the parking brake.
3. With the parking brake engaged
and your foot on the brake pedal,
turn the key to the ACCESSORY
position but do not start the engine.
Turn the wheel to the left to gain
access to the check plug.
4. Latch the gearshift lever in P (Park) and make sure that the engine is
OFF by placing the ignition in the Lock position..
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
279
5. Using the hole in the splash
shield, remove the check plug from
the side of the transmission.
If this is the first check of the
transmission fluid, it may be
necessary to remove the perforated
section of the splash shield (as
indicated on the splash shield).
6. Be sure the engine has been stopped for at least 3 minutes before
performing the fluid level check.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
280
7. The fluid level should be within
1/4 inch (6 mm) of the plug threads.
8. Replace the check plug.
Adjusting eCVT fluid levels
Before adding any fluid, make sure the correct type is used. The type of
fluid used is indicated in the Lubricant specifications section in this
chapter.
Use of a non-approved fluid may cause internal transaxle
component damage.
If the fluid level is low, add fluid through the check port until the level is
correct and fluid begins to run out of the transmission. If an overfill
occurs, excess fluid should be removed by allowing the fluid to run out
of the check port.
A serious overfill condition of transmission fluid may cause
damage.
Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives, treatments or
cleaning agents. The use of these materials may affect transmission
operation and result in damage to internal transmission components.
AIR FILTER MAINTENANCE
Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for the appropriate intervals
for changing the air filter element.
When changing the air filter element, use only the Motorcraft air filter
element listed. Refer to Motorcraft part numbers in this chapter.
Note: Do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not
remove it while the engine is running.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
281
Changing the air filter element
1. Release the clamps that secure the air filter housing cover.
2. Carefully separate the two halves
of the air filter housing.
3. Remove the air filter element from the air filter housing.
4. Wipe the air filter housing and cover clean to remove any dirt or
debris and to ensure good sealing.
5. Install a new air filter element. Be
careful not to crimp the filter
element edges between the air filter
housing and cover. This could cause
filter damage and allow unfiltered
air to enter the engine if not
properly seated.
6. Replace the air filter housing cover and secure the clamps.
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe
engine damage. The customer warranty may be voided for any damage to
the engine if the correct air filter element is not used.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
282
HIGH VOLTAGE BATTERY COOLING FILTER (REAR A/C)
MAINTENANCE
The high voltage battery has a dedicated A/C cooling system which
includes an air filter.
Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for the appropriate intervals
for changing the air filter element.
When changing the air filter element, use only the Motorcraft air filter
element listed. Refer to Motorcraft part numbers in this chapter.
Changing the high voltage battery air filter element
1. Remove access panel located in
the rear cargo area on the driver’s
side trim panel to expose the filter
cover.
2. Push the tabs (located on each
side of filter cover) while pulling
gently to remove filter cover.
3. Install new filter and filter cover (note arrows indicating top side).
4. Re-install the access panel into the trim panel.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
283
MOTORCRAFT PART NUMBERS
Component 2.3L I4 engine
Engine air filter element FA-1772
1
Rear A/C (high voltage battery
cooling) air filter element
FP-51
Fuel filter FG-800-A
Low voltage (underhood) battery BXT-96R
Oil filter FL-2017-A
4
PCV valve
2
Spark plugs
3
1
Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe engine
damage. The customer warranty may be voided for any damage to the
engine if the correct air filter element is not used.
2
The PCV valve is a critical emission component. It is one of the items
listed in the Scheduled Maintenance Guide chapter and is essential to
the life and performance of your vehicle and to its emissions system.
For PCV valve replacement, see your dealer or a qualified service
technician. Refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide chapter for the
appropriate intervals for changing the PCV valve.
Replace the PCV valve with one that meets Ford material and
design specifications for your vehicle, such as a Motorcraft or
equivalent replacement part. The customer warranty may be void
for any damage to the emissions system if such a PCV valve is not
used.
3
For spark plug replacement, see your dealer or a qualified service
technician. Refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide chapter for the
appropriate intervals for changing the spark plugs.
Replace the spark plugs with ones that meet Ford material and
design specifications for your vehicle, such as Motorcraft or
equivalent replacement parts. The customer warranty may be
void for any damage to the engine if such spark plugs are not
used.
4
When changing oil filter you must also replace the the O-ring, part
number 1S7G-6885-AC.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
284
REFILL CAPACITIES
Fluid Ford Part
Name
Application Capacity
Brake fluid Motorcraft High
Performance
DOT 3 Motor
Vehicle Brake
Fluid
All Between MIN
and MAX lines
on reservoir
Engine oil
(including filter
change)
5
Motorcraft SAE
5W-20 Premium
Synthetic Blend
Motor Oil (US)
Motorcraft SAE
5W-20 Super
Premium Motor
Oil (Canada)
2.3L I4 engine 4.5 quarts
(4.25L)
Fuel tank N/A 2.3L I4 engine 15 gallons
(56.8L)
Transmission
fluid
1
Motorcraft
MERCON威 (red)
ATF
eCVT automatic
transaxle
5.3 quarts
(5.0L)
2
Power Take-off
Unit
Motorcraft SAE
75W-140 High
Performance
Synthetic Rear
Axle Lubricant
4WD 12 ounces
(0.35L)
Engine coolant
3
Motorcraft
Premium Gold
Engine Coolant
(yellow-colored)
All 8.5 quarts
(8.0L)
Motor/Electronics
(M/E) Coolant
3
Motorcraft
Premium Gold
Engine Coolant
(yellow-colored)
All 3.7 quarts
(3.5L)
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
285
Fluid Ford Part
Name
Application Capacity
Rear axle
lubricant
Motorcraft SAE
80W-90
Premium Rear
Axle Lubricant
4WD 2.96 pints (1.4L)
4
Windshield
washer fluid
Motorcraft
Premium
Windshield
Washer
Concentrate
All 2.7 quarts
(2.6L)
1
Using any transmission fluid other than those that meet the
recommended specification may cause internal transaxle damage.
2
Indicates only approximate dry-fill capacity. Do NOT use MERCON威
CVT (blue) ATF. This vehicle uses only MERCON威 (red) ATF.
3
Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle.
4
Fill to 1/4 inch to 9/16 inch (6 mm to 14 mm) below bottom of fill hole.
5
Use of synthetic or synthetic blend motor oil is not mandatory. Engine
oil need only meet the requirements of Ford specification
WSS-M2C930-A and the API Certification mark.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
286
LUBRICANT SPECIFICATIONS
Item Ford Part
Name or
equivalent
Ford Part
Number
Ford
Specification
Body hinges,
latches, door
striker plates
and rollers, seat
tracks, fuel filler
door hinge and
spring, primary
and auxiliary
hood latches
Multi-Purpose
Grease
XG-4 or XL-5 ESB-M1C93-B or
ESR-M1C159-A
Brake fluid Motorcraft High
Performance
DOT 3 Motor
Vehicle Brake
Fluid
PM-1 ESA-M6C25-A
and DOT 3
Halfshaft CV
joints
Motorcraft
Constant
Velocity Joint
Grease
XG-5 WSS-M1C258–A1
Engine coolant
and M/E
coolant
1
Motorcraft
Premium Gold
Engine Coolant
(yellow-colored)
VC-7–A (U.S.,
except CA and
OR), VC-7–B
(CA and OR
only)
WSS-M97B51-A1
Engine oil Motorcraft SAE
5W-20 Premium
Synthetic Blend
Motor Oil (US)
Motorcraft SAE
5W-20 Super
Premium Motor
Oil (Canada)
XO-5W20-QSP
(US)
CXO-5W20–LSP12
(Canada)
WSS-M2C930-A
with API
Certification
Mark
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
287
Item Ford Part
Name or
equivalent
Ford Part
Number
Ford
Specification
Automatic eCVT
transaxle
2
Motorcraft
MERCON威 (red)
ATF
n/a MERCON
Rear axle
(4WD)
4
Motorcraft SAE
80W-90
Premium Rear
Axle Lubricant
XY-80W90-QL WSP-M2C197-A
Power
Take-off(PTO)
3
(4WD)
Motorcraft SAE
75W-140
Synthetic Rear
Axle Lubricant
XY-75W140–QL WSL-M2C192-A
Windshield
washer fluid
Motorcraft
Premium
Windshield
Washer
Concentrate
ZC-32–A WSB-M8B16–A2
1
DO NOT USE Motorcraft Specialty Orange Engine Coolant VC-2. Refer
to Adding engine coolant, in the this chapter.
2
Using any transmission fluid other than those that meet the
recommended specification may cause internal transaxle damage. Do
NOT use Motorcraft MERCON威 CVT (blue) ATF. This vehicle uses only
Motorcraft MERCON威 (red) ATF.
3
The Power Take-off (PTO) is lubricated for life with synthetic lube.
Lubricant levels are not to be checked or changed unless a leak is
suspected or repair required. Replace Power Take-off (PTO) lubricant
with specified synthetic lubricant anytime the unit is submerged in
water.
4
4WD vehicles exposed for prolonged periods to temperatures less than
–40° C (-40° F) should change out the rear axle fluid to Motorcraft SAE
75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant, Ford part number
XY-75W140–QL meeting Ford specification WSL-M2C192–A.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
288
ENGINE DATA
Engine 2.3L I4 engine
Cubic inches 140
Required fuel 87 octane
Firing order 1-3-4-2
Ignition system Coil on plug
Spark plug gap 0.049–0.053 inch (1.25–1.35mm)
Compression ratio 9.7:1
HIGH VOLTAGE BATTERY DATA
High Voltage Battery
Battery chemistry Nickel Metal Hydride
Nominal Voltage 330 Volts
Capacity 6 Amp-hours
VEHICLE DIMENSIONS
Dimensions 4 Door - inches (mm)
(1) Vehicle height/ Maximum
height*
69.7 (1770)/70.4 (1784)
(2) Front track / rear 61.3 (1557)/60.9 (1548)
(3) Overall width (body) 70.1 (1780)
(4) Wheelbase 103.1 (2620)
(5) Overall length 174.9 (4442)
* Denotes a 4WD vehicle
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
289
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
290
IDENTIFYING YOUR VEHICLE
Certification label
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require
that a Certification label be affixed
to a vehicle and prescribe where the
Certification label may be located.
The Certification label is located on
the structure by the trailing edge of
the driver’s door or the edge of the
driver’s door.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
291
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
The vehicle identification number is
attached to a metal tag and is
located on the driver side
instrument panel. (Please note that
in the graphic XXXX is
representative of your vehicle
identification number.)
1. World manufacturer identifier
2. Brake type and gross vehicle
weight rating (GVWR)
3. Vehicle line, series, body type
4. Engine type
5. Check digit
6. Model year
7. Assembly plant
8. Production sequence number
Engine number
The engine number (the last eight numbers of the vehicle identification
number) is stamped on the engine block, transmission and frame.
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
292
GENUINE FORD ACCESSORIES FOR YOUR VEHICLE
A wide selection of Genuine Ford Accessories are available for your vehicle
through your local authorized Ford or Ford of Canada dealer. These quality
accessories have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive
needs; they are custom designed to complement the style and aerodynamic
appearance of your vehicle. In addition, each accessory is made from high
quality materials and meets or exceeds Ford’s rigorous engineering and
safety specifications. Ford Motor Company will repair or replace any
properly dealer-installed Genuine Ford Accessory found to be defective in
factory-supplied materials or workmanship during the warranty period, as
well as any component damaged by the defective accessory. The accessory
will be warranted for whichever provides you the greatest benefit:
• 12 months or 12,000 miles (20,000 km) (whichever occurs first), or
• the remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty.
This means that Genuine Ford Accessories purchased along with your new
vehicle and installed by the dealer are covered for the full length of your
New Vehicle’s Limited Warranty — 3 years or 36,000 miles (60,000 km)
(whichever occurs first). Contact your dealer for details and a copy of the
warranty.
Not all accessories are available for all models.
The following is a list of several Genuine Ford Accessory products for
your vehicle. Not all accessories are available for all models. For a
complete listing of the accessories that are available for your vehicle,
please contact your dealer or visit our online store at:
www.fordaccessoriesstore.com.
Exterior style
Bug shields
Deflectors
Fender flares
Front end covers
Grille inserts
Headlamps, fog lights and Daytime Running Lamps (DRLs)
Running boards
Splash guards
Step Bars
Wheels
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Accessories
Accessories
293
Interior style
Electrochromatic compass/temperature interior mirrors
Floor mats
Leather wrapped steering wheels
Scuff plates
Lifestyle
Bike racks
Cargo organization and management
Rear seat entertainment systems
Towing mirrors
Trailer hitches, wiring harnesses and accessories
Peace of mind
First aid and highway safety kits
Full vehicle covers
Locking gas cap
Navigation systems
Remote start
Vehicle security systems
For maximum vehicle performance, keep the following information in
mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle:
• When adding accessories, equipment, passengers and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of
the front or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety
Compliance Certification label). Consult your dealer for specific weight
information.
• The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulate the use of mobile
communications systems — such as two-way radios, telephones and
theft alarms - that are equipped with radio transmitters. Any such
equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with FCC or CRTC
regulations and should be installed only by a qualified service
technician.
• Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your
vehicle, particularly if they are not properly designed for automotive
use.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Accessories
294
• To avoid interference with other vehicle functions, such as anti-lock
braking systems, amateur radio users who install radios and antennas
onto their vehicle should not locate the Amateur Radio Antennas in
the area of the driver’s side hood.
• Electrical or electronic accessories or components that are
non-Genuine Ford Accessories added to the vehicle by the dealer or
the owner may adversely affect battery performance and durability.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Accessories
295
GENERAL MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
Why maintain your vehicle?
This guide describes the scheduled maintenance required for your
vehicle. Carefully following this schedule helps protect against major
repair expenses resulting from neglect or inadequate maintenance and
may also help to increase the value of your vehicle when you sell or
trade it.
It is your responsibility to see that all scheduled maintenance is
performed and that the materials used meet Ford engineering
specifications. Failure to perform scheduled maintenance specific in this
guide will invalidate warranty coverage on parts affected by the lack of
maintenance. Be sure receipts for completed maintenance are kept with
the vehicle and confirmation of the work performed is always recorded in
this guide.
Your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealer, or Ford or Lincoln Mercury Quality
Care Center has factory trained technicians who can perform the
required maintenance using genuine Ford parts. They are committed to
meeting your service needs and to assuring your continuing satisfaction.
Protecting your investment
Maintenance is an investment that will pay dividends in the form of
improved reliability, durability and resale value. To assure the proper
performance of your vehicle and its emission control systems, it is
imperative that scheduled maintenance be completed at the designated
intervals.
Ford strongly recommends the use of genuine Ford replacement parts.
Parts other than Ford, Motorcraft or Ford authorized remanufactured
parts that are used for maintenance replacement or for the service of
components affecting emission control must be equivalent to genuine
Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability. It is the
owner’s responsibility to determine the equivalency of such parts. Please
consult your Warranty Guide for complete warranty information.
Engine Emissions label
Emissions information appears on the Engine Emissions label on the
underside of the hood. This decal identifies engine displacement and
provides certain engine specifications.
Any modification of the emissions control system could create liability
under federal law (U.S.) if made prior to sale and registration, under the
laws of some states if made thereafter. Further, federal law prohibits
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Scheduled Maintenance Guide
Scheduled Maintenance Guide
296
vehicle manufacturers, dealers and other persons engaged in the
business of repairing, servicing, selling, leasing or trading motor vehicles
as well as fleet operations from knowingly removing or rendering an
emissions control system inoperative after sale and delivery to an
ultimate purchaser. In Canada, modifications of the emissions control
system could create liability under applicable federal or provincial laws.
Genuine Ford Parts and Service
When planning your maintenance services, consider your Ford and
Lincoln Mercury dealership for all your vehicle’s needs.
Get the most from your service and maintenance visits
There are a lot of reasons why your Ford and Lincoln Mercury dealership
is a great way to help keep your vehicle running great.
Convenience
To make your service visit even more convenient, in many cases, you’ll
find extended evening hours and Saturday hours. How’s that for quality
service?
Factory-trained Technicians
Ford and Lincoln Mercury service technicians participate in extensive
factory-sponsored training to help them become the experts on the
operation of your vehicle. Many participate in Ford-sponsored training to
become certified. Ask your dealer about the training and certification
their technicians have received.
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft Replacement Parts
Ford and Lincoln Mercury dealerships stock Ford and Motorcraft
branded replacement parts. These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor
Company’s specifications, and we stand behind them. Maintenance parts
installed at your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealership carry a nationwide,
12 months, 12,000 mile parts and labor limited warranty. Your dealer can
give you details.
Value Shopping for Your Vehicle’s Maintenance Needs
Your dealership recognizes the competitive landscape of maintenance and
light repair automotive services. With factory-trained technicians, and
one-stop service from routine maintenance like oil changes and tire
rotations to repairs like brake service, check out the value your Ford and
Lincoln Mercury dealers can offer.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Scheduled Maintenance Guide
297
WHICH MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE SHOULD YOU FOLLOW?
Owner Checks and Services
Refer to Mileage Intervals for Additional Checks and Services
Certain basic maintenance checks and inspections should be performed
by the owner or a service technician at the intervals indicated. Service
information and supporting specifications are provided in this Owner’s
Guide.
Any adverse condition should be brought to the attention of your dealer
or qualified service technician as soon as possible for the proper service
advice. The owner maintenance service checks are generally not covered
by warranties so you may be charged for labor, parts or lubricants used.
Maximum Oil Change Interval:
12 months, 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 200 hours of engine operation.
Check every month:
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights
• Check tires for wear and correct air pressure, including spare tire
• Check windshield washer fluid level
• Check engine oil level
Check every six months:
• Check lap/shoulder belts and seat latches for wear and function
• Check parking brake for proper operation
• Check safety warning lamps (brake, ABS, air bag, safety belt) for
operation
• Check cooling system fluid level and coolant strength
• Check low voltage (underhood) battery connections and clean if
necessary
• Check washer spray, wiper operation and clean all wiper blades
(replace as necessary)
• Check and lubricate all hinges, latches and outside locks. Inspect for
correct operation
• Check and lubricate door rubber weatherstrips. Inspect for excessive
wear
• Check and clean body and door drain holes. Inspect for clogs and
obstructions
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Scheduled Maintenance Guide
298
Multi-point Inspection
In order to keep your vehicle running right, it is important that you have the
systems on your vehicle checked regularly. This can help identify any
potential issue before there are any problems. Ford Motor Company suggests
the following multi-point inspection to be performed at every scheduled
maintenance as the way to ensure your vehicle keeps running right.
Multi-point inspection - Recommended at every visit
• Check and top up fluid levels: brake, engine coolant recovery
reservoir, motor/electronics reservoir and window washer.
• Inspect tires for wear and correct air pressure.
• Check exhaust system for leaks, damage, loose parts and foreign
materials.
• Check low voltage (underhood) battery performance.
• Check operation of horn, exterior lamps, turn signals and hazard
warning lights.
• Check radiator, coolers and heater and air conditioning hoses.
• Inspect windshield washer spray and wiper operation.
• Check windshield for cracks, chips and pitting.
• Inspect for oil and fluid leaks.
• Inspect engine air cleaner filter and elements.
• Inspect half-shaft dust boots.
• Check shocks, struts and other suspension components for leaks and
damage.
NORMAL SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE AND LOG
The following section contains the “Normal Schedule”. This schedule is
presented at specific mileage (kilometer) intervals with exceptions noted.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AVAILABLE ON THE WEB
To learn more about the importance of routine and dealer-performed
maintenance on your vehicle, please visit the Ford Customer Service
website. You’ll also find important warranty information, customer
assistance, technical expertise, frequently asked questions and much
more. The website location is: www.ford.com.
Then go to the vehicles and service pick at the web site.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Scheduled Maintenance Guide
299
U.S. SCHEDULE
Maintenance Item
Maintenance Interval
Miles (x 1000) 5 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
Km (x 1000) 8 16 32 48 64 80 96 112
Change engine oil and replace oil filter •••••••
Inspect tires for wear and measure tread depth ••••••••
Rotate tires ••••••••
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, brake lines and
hoses and parking brake
•••
Inspect engine and motor/electrical cooling system and hoses •••
Inspect steering linkage, suspension and, if equipped,
halfshafts, driveshaft and ball joints
•••
Inspect exhaust system and heat shields •••
Inspect high voltage battery A/C filter ••••
Replace high voltage battery A/C filter •••
Replace engine air filter ••
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Scheduled Maintenance Guide
300
Maintenance Item
Maintenance Interval
Miles (x 1000) 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
Km (x 1000) 128 144 160 176 192 208 224 240
Change engine oil and replace oil filter ••••••••
Inspect tires for wear and measure tread depth ••••••••
Rotate tires ••••••••
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, brake lines and
hoses and parking brake
•• • •
Inspect engine and motor/electrical cooling system and hoses •• • •
Inspect steering linkage, suspension and, if equipped,
halfshafts, driveshaft and ball joints
•• • •
Inspect exhaust system and heat shields •• • •
Inspect high voltage battery A/C filter ••••
Replace high voltage battery A/C filter •• • •
Replace engine air filter •••
Replace fuel filter •
Replace engine coolant* ••
Inspect accessory drive belt •
Replace accessory drive belt (if not replaced in the last
100,000 miles [160,000 km])
•
Replace spark plugs •
Inspect PCV valve for flow and replace, if required •
Replace rear axle lubricant (4WD vehicles only) •
* Replace engine coolant after five years or 100,000 miles (160,000 km), whichever comes first, then every three years
or 50,000 miles (80,000 km) thereafter. Refer to the Motorcraft Premium Gold Coolant Change Record section later in
this section for more information.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Scheduled Maintenance Guide
301
Date:
Odometer reading:
R.O.#
Dealer’s Stamp:
Date:
Odometer reading:
R.O.#
Dealer’s Stamp:
Date:
Odometer reading:
R.O.#
Dealer’s Stamp:
Date:
Odometer reading:
R.O.#
Dealer’s Stamp:
Date:
Odometer reading:
R.O.#
Dealer’s Stamp:
Date:
Odometer reading:
R.O.#
Dealer’s Stamp:
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Scheduled Maintenance Guide
302
Date:
Odometer reading:
R.O.#
Dealer’s Stamp:
Date:
Odometer reading:
R.O.#
Dealer’s Stamp:
Date:
Odometer reading:
R.O.#
Dealer’s Stamp:
Date:
Odometer reading:
R.O.#
Dealer’s Stamp:
Date:
Odometer reading:
R.O.#
Dealer’s Stamp:
Date:
Odometer reading:
R.O.#
Dealer’s Stamp:
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Scheduled Maintenance Guide
303
Date:
Odometer reading:
R.O.#
Dealer’s Stamp:
Date:
Odometer reading:
R.O.#
Dealer’s Stamp:
Date:
Odometer reading:
R.O.#
Dealer’s Stamp:
Date:
Odometer reading:
R.O.#
Dealer’s Stamp:
Date:
Odometer reading:
R.O.#
Dealer’s Stamp:
Date:
Odometer reading:
R.O.#
Dealer’s Stamp:
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Scheduled Maintenance Guide
304
Date:
Odometer reading:
R.O.#
Dealer’s Stamp:
Date:
Odometer reading:
R.O.#
Dealer’s Stamp:
CANADIAN SCHEDULE
For items marked with an asterisk (*), more frequent service intervals
will be required. Refer to Special operating conditions at the end of
this section for more information.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Scheduled Maintenance Guide
305
Maintenance Item
Maintenance Interval
Kilometers (x 1000) 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50
Change engine oil and replace oil filter* ••••
Inspect tires for wear, measure tread depth and rotate
tires
••••
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, brake lines
and hoses and parking brake
•
Inspect engine and motor/electrical cooling system and
hoses
•
Lubricate hinges, latches and locks •
Lubricate weatherstrips •
Inspect steering linkage, suspension and, if equipped,
driveshaft and ball joints
•
Inspect high voltage battery A/C filter* •• •
Replace high voltage battery A/C filter •
Inspect engine air filter* •
Replace engine air filter*
Replace fuel filter*
Replace engine coolant*
Multipoint inspection* ••••
Replace accessory drive belt
Replace spark plugs*
Inspect PCV valve for flow, replace if required*
Replace PCV valve
Replace rear axle lubricant (4WD vehicles only)
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Scheduled Maintenance Guide
306
Maintenance Item
Maintenance Interval
Kilometers (x 1000) 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100
Change engine oil and replace oil filter* •••
Inspect tires for wear, measure tread depth and rotate
tires
•••
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, brake lines
and hoses and parking brake
••
Inspect engine and motor/electrical cooling system and
hoses
••
Lubricate hinges, latches and locks ••
Lubricate weatherstrips ••
Inspect steering linkage, suspension and, if equipped,
driveshaft and ball joints
••
Inspect high voltage battery A/C filter* •
Replace high voltage battery A/C filter ••
Inspect engine air filter* •
Replace engine air filter* •
Replace fuel filter*
Replace engine coolant*
Multipoint inspection* •••
Replace accessory drive belt
Replace spark plugs*
Inspect PCV valve for flow, replace if required*
Replace PCV valve
Replace rear axle lubricant (4WD vehicles only)
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Scheduled Maintenance Guide
307
Maintenance Item
Maintenance Interval
Kilometers (x 1000) 105 110 115 120 125 130 135 140 145 150
Change engine oil and replace oil filter* ••••
Inspect tires for wear, measure tread depth and rotate
tires
••••
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, brake lines
and hoses and parking brake
••
Inspect engine and motor/electrical cooling system and
hoses
••
Lubricate hinges, latches and locks ••
Lubricate weatherstrips ••
Inspect steering linkage, suspension and, if equipped,
driveshaft and ball joints
••
Inspect high voltage battery A/C filter* ••
Replace high voltage battery A/C filter ••
Inspect engine air filter* •
Replace engine air filter* •
Replace fuel filter* •
Replace engine coolant* •
Multipoint inspection* ••••
Replace accessory drive belt
Replace spark plugs* •
Inspect PCV valve for flow, replace if required* •
Replace PCV valve
Replace rear axle lubricant (4WD vehicles only)
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Scheduled Maintenance Guide
308
Maintenance Item
Maintenance Interval
Kilometers (x 1000) 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200
Change engine oil and replace oil filter* •••
Inspect tires for wear, measure tread depth and rotate
tires
•••
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, brake lines
and hoses and parking brake
•
Inspect engine and motor/electrical cooling system and
hoses
•
Lubricate hinges, latches and locks •
Lubricate weatherstrips •
Inspect steering linkage, suspension and, if equipped,
driveshaft and ball joints
•
Inspect high voltage battery A/C filter* ••
Replace high voltage battery A/C filter •
Inspect engine air filter*
Replace engine air filter* •
Replace fuel filter*
Replace engine coolant*
Multipoint inspection* •••
Replace accessory drive belt
Replace spark plugs*
Inspect PCV valve for flow, replace if required*
Replace PCV valve
Replace rear axle lubricant (4WD vehicles only)
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Scheduled Maintenance Guide
309
Maintenance Item
Maintenance Interval
Kilometers (x 1000) 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240 245 250
Change engine oil and replace oil filter* •••
Inspect tires for wear, measure tread depth and rotate
tires
•••
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, brake lines
and hoses and parking brake
••
Inspect engine and motor/electrical cooling system and
hoses
••
Lubricate hinges, latches and locks ••
Lubricate weatherstrips ••
Inspect steering linkage, suspension and, if equipped,
driveshaft and ball joints
••
Inspect high voltage battery A/C filter* •
Replace high voltage battery A/C filter ••
Inspect engine air filter* •
Replace engine air filter* •
Replace fuel filter* •
Replace engine coolant* •
Multipoint inspection* •••
Replace accessory drive belt •
Replace spark plugs*
Inspect PCV valve for flow, replace if required*
Replace PCV valve •
Replace rear axle lubricant (4WD vehicles only) •
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Scheduled Maintenance Guide
310
Maintenance Item
Maintenance Interval
Kilometers (x 1000) 255 260 265 270 275 280 285 290 295 300
Change engine oil and replace oil filter* ••••
Inspect tires for wear, measure tread depth and rotate
tires
••••
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, brake lines
and hoses and parking brake
••
Inspect engine and motor/electrical cooling system and
hoses
••
Lubricate hinges, latches and locks ••
Lubricate weatherstrips ••
Inspect steering linkage, suspension and, if equipped,
driveshaft and ball joints
••
Inspect high voltage battery A/C filter* ••
Replace high voltage battery A/C filter ••
Inspect engine air filter* •
Replace engine air filter* •
Replace fuel filter*
Replace engine coolant*
Multipoint inspection* ••••
Replace accessory drive belt
Replace spark plugs* •
Inspect PCV valve for flow, replace if required*
Replace PCV valve
Replace rear axle lubricant (4WD vehicles only)
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Scheduled Maintenance Guide
311
Date:
Odometer reading:
R.O.#
Dealer’s Stamp:
Date:
Odometer reading:
R.O.#
Dealer’s Stamp:
Date:
Odometer reading:
R.O.#
Dealer’s Stamp:
Date:
Odometer reading:
R.O.#
Dealer’s Stamp:
Date:
Odometer reading:
R.O.#
Dealer’s Stamp:
Date:
Odometer reading:
R.O.#
Dealer’s Stamp:
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Scheduled Maintenance Guide
312
Date:
Odometer reading:
R.O.#
Dealer’s Stamp:
Date:
Odometer reading:
R.O.#
Dealer’s Stamp:
Date:
Odometer reading:
R.O.#
Dealer’s Stamp:
Date:
Odometer reading:
R.O.#
Dealer’s Stamp:
Date:
Odometer reading:
R.O.#
Dealer’s Stamp:
Date:
Odometer reading:
R.O.#
Dealer’s Stamp:
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Scheduled Maintenance Guide
313
Date:
Odometer reading:
R.O.#
Dealer’s Stamp:
Date:
Odometer reading:
R.O.#
Dealer’s Stamp:
Date:
Odometer reading:
R.O.#
Dealer’s Stamp:
Date:
Odometer reading:
R.O.#
Dealer’s Stamp:
Date:
Odometer reading:
R.O.#
Dealer’s Stamp:
Date:
Odometer reading:
R.O.#
Dealer’s Stamp:
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Scheduled Maintenance Guide
314
Date:
Odometer reading:
R.O.#
Dealer’s Stamp:
Date:
Odometer reading:
R.O.#
Dealer’s Stamp:
SPECIAL OPERATING CONDITIONS
If your vehicle is operated in any of the following manners, you will need
to perform some maintenance operations more frequently:
• Towing a trailer or using a camper or car-top carrier
• Extensive idling and/or low-speed driving for long distances as in
heavy commercial use such as delivery, taxi, patrol or livery
• Operating in dusty conditions such as unpaved or dusty roads
• Off-road operation
If any of the above conditions apply to your vehicle operation, you will
meed to perform the following maintenance operations in addition to the
operations listed in the maintenance schedule:
Every 5,000 km:
• Change engine oil and replace oil filter
• Inspect high voltage battery A/C filter
• Inspect engine air filter
• Perform multipoint inspection
Every 60,000 km:
• Replace fuel filter
Every 120,000 km:
• Replace spark plugs
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Scheduled Maintenance Guide
315
SPECIAL OPERATING CONDITIONS
Towing a trailer or using a camper or car-top carrier
• Every 3,000 miles or 3 months: Change engine oil and replace filter
Extensive Idling and/or Low Speed Driving for Long Distances as
in Heavy Commercial Use Such as Delivery, Taxi, Patrol Vehicle or
Livery. Severe Duty Schedule is for Extensive Maximum A/C or
Heater Operation with engine on in the above listed usage.
• Every 3,000 miles, 3 months or 200 hours of engine operation
(whichever comes first): Change engine oil and replace filter
• Every 60,000 miles: Replace spark plugs
• As required: Replace cabin air filter, if equipped
Operating in dusty conditions such as unpaved or dusty roads
• Every 3,000 miles or 3 months: Change engine oil and replace filter
• As required: Replace cabin air filter, if equipped
• As required: Replace engine air filter
• As required: Replace high voltage battery A/C air filter
Off-road operation
• Every 3,000 miles or 3 months: Change engine oil and replace filter
• As required: Replace cabin air filter, if equipped
• As required: Replace engine air filter
• As required: Replace high voltage battery A/C filter
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Scheduled Maintenance Guide
316
Date:
Odometer reading:
R.O.#
Dealer’s Stamp:
See corresponding mileage in maintenance schedule for services performed.
Date:
Odometer reading:
R.O.#
Dealer’s Stamp:
See corresponding mileage in maintenance schedule for services performed.
Date:
Odometer reading:
R.O.#
Dealer’s Stamp:
See corresponding mileage in maintenance schedule for services performed.
Date:
Odometer reading:
R.O.#
Dealer’s Stamp:
See corresponding mileage in maintenance schedule for services performed.
MOTORCRAFT PREMIUM GOLD COOLANT CHANGE RECORD
The charts below will help you calculate your next service interval for
your engine coolant change. Your first engine coolant change should
occur at five years or 100,000 miles (160,000 km), whichever comes first.
After the first coolant change the coolant should be changed every three
years or 50,000 miles (80,000 km)whichever comes first.
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Scheduled Maintenance Guide
317
Current mileage goes here =>
Add 50,000 miles to the current miles + 50,000
Next change due at this mileage =>
Or
Today’s date goes here =>
Add 3 years + 00 / 00 / 03
Date of next change =>
whichever comes first
Dealer Stamp
P & A CODE
R.O.#
Current mileage goes here =>
Add 50,000 miles to the current miles + 50,000
Next change due at this mileage =>
Or
Today’s date goes here =>
Add 3 years + 00 / 00 / 03
Date of next change =>
whichever comes first
Dealer Stamp
P & A CODE
R.O.#
Current mileage goes here =>
Add 50,000 miles to the current miles + 50,000
Next change due at this mileage =>
Or
Today’s date goes here =>
Add 3 years + 00 / 00 / 03
Date of next change =>
whichever comes first
Dealer Stamp
P & A CODE
R.O.#
Current mileage goes here =>
Add 50,000 miles to the current miles + 50,000
Next change due at this mileage =>
Or
Today’s date goes here =>
Add 3 years + 00 / 00 / 03
Date of next change =>
whichever comes first
Dealer Stamp
P & A CODE
R.O.#
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Scheduled Maintenance Guide
318
A
Air bag supplemental restraint
system ................138–139, 145, 148
and child safety seats ............140
description ..............139, 145, 148
disposal ....................................151
driver air bag ..........141, 146, 149
indicator light .........145, 148, 150
operation .................141, 146, 149
passenger air bag ...141, 146, 149
side air bag ..............................148
Air cleaner filter ...............281–284
All Wheel Drive (AWD),
driving off road .........................211
Ambulance packages ..................11
Anti-lock brake system
(see Brakes) ......................205–206
Anti-theft system ......................115
arming the system ..................115
disarming a triggered
system .....................................116
Audio system (see Radio) ...20, 24
Automatic transaxle
fluid, adding ............................279
fluid, checking ........................279
Automatic transmission
driving an automatic
overdrive .................................210
fluid, refill capacities ..............285
fluid, specification ..................289
Auxiliary power point .................88
Axle
lubricant specifications ..287, 289
refill capacities ........................285
B
Battery .......................................261
acid, treating emergencies .....261
jumping a disabled
battery .............................229, 234
maintenance-free ....................261
replacement, specifications ...284
servicing ..................................261
BeltMinder .................................133
Brakes ........................................205
anti-lock ...........................205–206
anti-lock brake system (ABS)
warning light ...........................206
fluid, checking and adding ....278
fluid, refill capacities ..............285
fluid, specifications .........287, 289
lubricant specifications ..287, 289
parking ....................................207
shift interlock ..........................208
Bulbs ............................................80
C
Calculating load ........................196
Capacities for refilling fluids ....285
Cargo area shade ......................105
Cassette tape player ...................24
Cell phone use ..........................104
Certification Label ....................291
Child safety restraints ..............152
child safety belts ....................152
Child safety seats ......................154
attaching with tether straps ..158
in front seat ............................156
in rear seat ..............................156
Cleaning your vehicle
engine compartment ..............249
instrument panel ....................251
interior .....................................251
interior trim ............................251
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Index
Index
319
plastic parts ............................250
washing ....................................248
waxing .....................................248
wheels ......................................249
wiper blades
............................250
Climate control (see Air
conditioning or Heating)
............72
Clock adjust
6-CD in dash
.......................26, 30
AM/FM/Tape/CD
.......................21
Console
......................................104
Controls
power seat
...............................118
Coolant
checking and adding
......263–265
refill capacities
................267, 285
specifications
..................287, 289
Cruise control
(see Speed control)
....................92
Customer Assistance
................219
Ford accessories for your
vehicle
.....................................252
Ford Extended Service
Plan
..........................................245
Getting assistance outside the
U.S. and Canada
.....................246
Getting roadside assistance
...219
Getting the service you
need
.........................................239
Ordering additional owner’s
literature
.................................247
The Dispute Settlement
Board
.......................................242
Utilizing the
Mediation/Arbitration
Program
...................................245
D
Daytime running lamps
(see Lamps) ................................76
Defrost
rear window ..............................73
Dipstick
automatic transmission
fluid ..........................................279
engine oil .................................258
Doors
lubricant specifications ..........287
Driving under special
conditions ..................211, 213, 216
sand .........................................215
snow and ice ...........................217
through water .................215, 218
E
Electronic message center .........94
Emergencies, roadside
jump-starting ..................229, 234
Emission control system ..........276
Engine ........................................289
cleaning ...................................249
idle speed control ...................261
lubrication
specifications ..................287, 289
refill capacities ........................285
service points ..........................257
Engine block heater .................204
Engine oil ..................................258
checking and adding ..............258
dipstick ....................................258
filter, specifications ........260, 284
recommendations ...................260
refill capacities ........................285
specifications ..................287, 289
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Index
320
Exhaust fumes ..........................204
F
Fluid capacities .........................285
Foglamps .....................................75
Four-Wheel Drive vehicles
driving off road .......................212
preparing to drive your
vehicle .....................................208
Fuel ............................................268
calculating fuel
economy ............................95, 273
cap ...........................................270
capacity ...................................285
choosing the right fuel ...........271
comparisons with EPA fuel
economy estimates .................275
detergent in fuel .....................272
filling your vehicle with
fuel ...........................268, 270, 273
filter, specifications ........273, 284
fuel pump/high voltage
shut-off switches ....................220
improving fuel economy ........273
octane rating ...................272, 289
quality ......................................272
running out of fuel .................272
safety information relating to
automotive fuels .....................268
Fuses ..................................222–223
G
Gas cap (see Fuel cap) ............270
Gas mileage
(see Fuel economy) .................273
Gauges .........................................18
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight
Rating)
calculating ...............................196
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating)
calculating ...............................196
H
Hazard flashers .........................220
Head restraints .................117, 119
Headlamps ...................................74
aiming ........................................77
autolamp system .......................74
bulb specifications ....................80
daytime running lights .............76
flash to pass ..............................76
high beam .................................76
replacing bulbs .........................81
turning on and off ....................74
Hood ..........................................256
I
Ignition ...............................201, 289
Infant seats
(see Safety seats) .....................154
Inspection/maintenance (I/M)
testing ........................................277
Instrument panel
cleaning ...................................251
cluster ........................................14
lighting up panel and
interior .......................................77
J
Jump-starting your
vehicle ................................229, 234
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Index
321
K
Keys
positions of the ignition .........201
L
Lamps
autolamp system .......................74
bulb replacement
specifications chart ..................80
daytime running light ...............76
fog lamps ...................................75
headlamps .................................74
headlamps, flash to pass ..........76
instrument panel, dimming .....77
interior lamps .....................79–81
replacing bulbs .......80–81, 83–85
Lane change indicator
(see Turn signal) ........................79
Liftgate ......................................105
Lights, warning and indicator ....14
anti-lock brakes (ABS) ..........206
Load limits .................................189
Loading instructions .................195
Locks
childproof ................................111
Lubricant specifications ...........287
Lug nuts ....................................179
Luggage rack .............................106
M
Message center ...........................95
english/metric button ...............97
system check button ................97
warning messages .....................98
Mirrors
fold away ...................................92
side view mirrors (power) .......91
Motorcraft parts ................273, 284
N
Navigation system .......................33
quick start .................................39
radio functions ..........................44
setting the clock .......................69
O
Octane rating ............................272
Oil (see Engine oil) ..................258
P
Parking brake ............................207
Parts (see Motorcraft parts) ....284
Passenger Occupant
Classification Sensor .................126
Power distribution box
(see Fuses) ...............................226
Power mirrors .............................91
Power point .................................88
Power steering ..........................207
fluid, specifications .................287
Power Windows ...........................90
Preparing to drive your
vehicle ........................................208
R
Radio ......................................20, 24
Rear window defroster ...............73
Relays ........................................222
Remote entry system
illuminated entry ....................115
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Index
322
locking/unlocking doors .........109
Roadside assistance ..................219
Roof rack ...................................106
S
Safety Belt Maintenance ..........138
Safety belts (see Safety
restraints) ..................124, 128–132
Safety Canopy ...................145, 149
Safety defects, reporting ..........247
Safety restraints ........124, 128–132
belt minder .............................133
extension assembly ................132
for adults .........................129–131
for children .....................151–152
Occupant Classification
Sensor ......................................126
safety belt maintenance .........138
warning light and chime ........133
Safety seats for children ..........154
Scheduled Maintenance
Guide .........................................296
Coolant Change Record .........317
General Maintenance
Information .............................296
Normal Scheduled
Maintenance and Log .............299
Special Operating
Conditions ...............................316
What Maintenance Schedule
Should You Follow? ................298
Seat belts
(see Safety restraints) .............124
Seats ..........................................117
child safety seats ....................154
heated ......................................119
Servicing your vehicle ..............254
Setting the clock
AM/FM/In-dash 6 CD ..........26, 30
AM/FM/Tape/CD .......................21
Snowplowing ...............................11
Spark plugs,
specifications .....................284, 289
Special notice
ambulance conversions ............11
utility-type vehicles ..................11
Specification chart,
lubricants ...........................287, 289
Speed control ..............................92
Starting your vehicle ........201, 203
jump starting ..................229, 234
Steering wheel
tilting .........................................88
T
Tilt steering wheel ......................88
Tires ...................................165–167
alignment ................................186
care ..........................................184
changing ..................................172
checking the pressure ............168
inspecting and inflating .........167
label .........................................184
replacing ..................................170
rotating ....................................187
safety practices .......................185
sidewall information ...............179
snow tires and chains ............188
spare tire .................................171
terminology .............................167
tire grades ...............................166
treadwear ........................166, 184
Towing .......................................196
recreational towing .................200
trailer towing ..........................196
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Index
323
wrecker ....................................237
Transmission .............................208
brake-shift interlock (BSI) ....208
fluid, checking and adding
(automatic) .............................279
fluid, refill capacities ..............285
lubricant specifications ..287, 289
Turn signal ..................................79
V
Vehicle dimensions ...................289
Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) ..........................................292
Vehicle loading ..........................189
Ventilating your vehicle ...........205
W
Warning lights (see Lights) .......14
Washer fluid ..............................258
Water, Driving through .............218
Windows
power .........................................90
rear wiper/washer .....................87
Windshield washer fluid and
wipers
checking and adding fluid .....258
liftgate reservoir .....................258
operation ...................................86
replacing wiper blades .............87
Wrecker towing .........................237
REVIEW COPY
2005 Escape HEV (hev), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Index
324
325
326
327
328
